Siebels Sppt
-
Upload
dsunte-wilson -
Category
Documents
-
view
212 -
download
0
Transcript of Siebels Sppt
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1/1241
Module i: Siebel 8.0 Essentials
Training
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 2/1241
Module Agenda
This module provides an introduction to the:
Instructor and class participants
Training site information
Course: Audience
Prerequisites
Goal
Objectives
Methodology Materials
Agenda
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 3/1241
Instructor and Class Participants
Who are you?
Name
Company
Role
What is your prior experience?
Siebel Applications
Relational database
How do you expect to benefit from this course?
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 4/1241
Training Site Information
Bathrooms
Telephones
Fire Exits
Class duration and bre
Meals and refreshmen
Questions?
C A di
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 5/1241
Course Audience
This course is designed for implementation teams
Application developers
System architects and configurators
Database administrators
Systems administrators
C P i it
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 6/1241
Course Prerequisites
Basic Windows or NT navigation and file-manageme
Understanding of basic relational database concepts
Familiarity with application development
Familiarity with Web-based and client/server applica
C G l
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 7/1241
Course Goal
To enable participants to identify and perform tasks
an initial Siebel 8 Application deployment
C Obj ti
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 8/1241
Course Objectives
Navigate the Siebel application user interface
Secure access to Siebel applications and data
Define your company structure
Describe the Siebel application architecture
Describe the steps required to install Siebel applicat
to set up your enterprise
Configure a Siebel application
Automate business rules in your Siebel application
Populate and migrate data into the Siebel database
Migrate data between environments
Course Methodology
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 9/1241
Course Methodology
Subject matter is delivered via:
Lecture and slide presentations
Software demonstrations
Class discussions Hands-on labs
Course Materials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 10/1241
Course Materials
Student Guide
All slides presented during lecture
Notes that point to Siebel Bookshelf references
Lab Guide Hands-on lab exercises and solutions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 11/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 12/1241
Course Agenda Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 13/1241
Course Agenda Continued
Installation and Security
12: Securing Access to the Application
13: Installing Siebel Applications
Siebel Application Architecture 14: Siebel Application Architecture
15: Using Siebel Tools to Examine Object Definitions
16: The Siebel Data Model
17: Siebel Business Components
18: Siebel Party Business Components
19: Siebel Business Objects
20: Configuration Strategy
21: The Configuration Process
Course Agenda Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 14/1241
Course Agenda Continued
Application Configuration
22: Managing Object Definitions
23: Editing and Compiling Object Definitions
24: UI Layer Configuration: Web Templates 25: UI Layer Configuration: Applets
26: UI Layer Configuration: Applications, Screens, and
27: UI Layer Configuration: Drilldowns
28: Business Layer Configuration: Joins
29: Business Layer Configuration: Existing Business Cand Fields
30: Business Layer Configuration: New Business Com
Fields
31: Business Layer Configuration: Picklists
32: Configuring Multi-Value Groups
33: Data Layer Configuration
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 15/1241
Course Agenda Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 16/1241
Course Agenda Continued
Configuring Business Logic (Continued)
47: Invoking Siebel Assignment Manager
48: State Models
Data Loads 49: Introducing Enterprise Integration Manager
50: Creating Data Maps
51: Running Enterprise Integration Manager
Application Deployment
52: Introducing Application Deployment Manager
53: Deploying Application Customizations
Summary
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 17/1241
Summary
This module provides an introduction to the:
Instructor and class participants
Training site information
Course: Audience
Prerequisites
Goal
Objectives
Methodology
Materials
Agenda
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 18/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 19/1241
Module 1: Introducing Siebel
Applications
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
Module Objectives
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 20/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe Siebel Customer Relationship Management (
applications and how they are classified
Identify the common business entities found in Siebel Capplications
Why you need to know:
You need to be familiar with Siebel applications to unde
context of this course
Siebel Customer Relationship Management (CRM
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 21/1241
Siebel Customer Relationship Management (CRM
Enables you to manage interactions with customers, p
and employees
Typically deployed as a single application with broad fu
Supports multiple communication channels Web and email
Call center
Field service
Uses a single database to:
Allow all users access to the same set of data
Example: The correct customer order status is seen by al
users
Ensure changes to data are made once and only once
Example: An address needs to be updated in only one pla
Is a packaged application with built-in best practices
Siebel CRM Applications
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 22/1241
Siebel CRM Applications
Are available tailored for:
Different types of customer, partner, or employee intera
channels (horizontal applications)
Different industries (industry applications)
Examples:
Horizontal applications
Siebel Sales
Siebel Call Center
Siebel Partner Portal
Siebel Remote
Industry applications
Siebel Finance
Siebel Consumer Goods
Types of Siebel Enterprise Applications
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 23/1241
yp p pp
Employee applications
Are used by internal employees
Examples include:
Siebel Call Center Siebel Sales
Customer and partner applications
Are used by customers and partners
Examples include:
Siebel eSales
Siebel Partner Portal
Employee Application: Siebel Sales
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 24/1241
p y pp
Siebel Sales may be used by a company’s sales repr
and managers to manage accounts, sales opportuniti
contacts
Siebel Sales
Opportunities screen
Employee Application: Siebel Call Center
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 25/1241
p y pp
Siebel Call Center may be used by a company’s teles
service representativesSiebel Call Center
service screen
Customer Application: Siebel eSales
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 26/1241
pp
May be used by customers to purchase products ove
Includes an interactive product catalog, search and pr
comparison mechanisms, and online ordering capabil
Shopping cartProduct catalog
Partner Application: Siebel Partner Portal
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 27/1241
pp
May be used by a company’s partners to communicat
collaborate, and conduct business with a Web-based
Pa
oppor
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 28/1241
Siebel User Interface (UI) Modes
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 29/1241
High Interactivity Mode
Standard Interactivity Mode
The Siebel UI is rendered in one of two modes:
High Interactivity Mode
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 30/1241
Is available for employee applications, supporting hig
interactive users
Uses additional code, such as Active X controls, to pr
functionality Drag-and-drop for setting column widths
Explorer-like hierarchy views
Menu bar and tool bars
Saving records by moving off the current line
Requires Internet Explorer (check documentation for v
Standard Interactivity Mode
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 31/1241
Is available for customer and employee applications
Designed to be less browser-dependent
Behaves like a typical HTML-based Web application
Available on a wide variety of browsers (check documfor supported browsers)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 32/1241
Common Siebel Business Components
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 33/1241
Service Requests
Contacts
Opportunities
Accounts
Assets
Accounts
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 34/1241
Are businesses external to your company
Represent a current or potential client, a business par
competitor
Are associated with a team
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 35/1241
Opportunities
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 36/1241
Are potential revenue-generating events
Have the following characteristics:
A possible association with an account
A probability of completion
A close date
Are associated with a team
Service Requests
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 37/1241
Are requests from customers or prospects for informa
assistance with your products or services
Have the following characteristics:
A status
A severity level
A priority level
Are associated with a single owner
Assets
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 38/1241
Are instances of purchased products
Have the following characteristics:
An asset number
A product and part number
A status level
Module Highlights
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 39/1241
Siebel CRM applications allow you to manage all cust
points of contact
Types of Siebel CRM enterprise applications are:
Employee applications: Siebel Call Center, Siebel Sale
on
Customer applications: Siebel eSales, Siebel Partner P
so on
Common Siebel business components include:
Accounts
Contacts
Opportunities
Service requests
Assets
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 40/1241
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 41/1241
Module 2: Using the Siebel Web Client
Module Objectives
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 42/1241
After completing this module you should be able to:
Start and log in to a Siebel application
Navigate screens and views in the application
Identify major user interface (UI) features in a Siebel C
application
Why you need to know:
Understanding the UI enables you to effectively use an
Siebel applications
Logging In to a Siebel Application
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 43/1241
Start a Siebel application in a Web browser by enterin
application’s URL
Log in using assigned user ID and password
Use
pa
Application URL
Application URLs
A Si b l li ti ’ URL i f d f
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 44/1241
A Siebel application’s URL is formed from :
Application’s Web server name
Application name
Suffix identifying the application language
Examples:
http://AppServer0.MyCompany.com/callcenter_enu
Web server name: Appserver0.MyCompany.com
Application name: callcenter (Siebel Call Center
Language suffix: _enu (American English)
http://public.MyCompany.com/esales_fraWeb server name: public.MyCompany.com
Application name: esales (Siebel eSales)
Language suffix: _fra (French)
Application Home Page
Di l d ft l i t Si b l li ti
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 45/1241
Displayed after log-in to a Siebel application
Personalized data
provides direct links
to common tasks
Personal
by clicki
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 46/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 47/1241
Global Toolbar: iHelp and Reports
Access context sensitive tasks and reports associated
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 48/1241
Access context-sensitive tasks and reports associated
current screen
Click the How Do I button to
access iHelp, which provides
guidance with tasks
Click the Rep
access rep
screen you a
Global Toolbar: Site Map
Access a list of all application areas available to the u
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 49/1241
Access a list of all application areas available to the u
Site Map listsapplication
areas
Site Map button
Drilling down on
an area shows
detailed
navigation
Screens
Represent groups of related data for a functional busi
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 50/1241
Represent groups of related data for a functional busi
such as accounts, contacts, or opportunities
Screen tab
Link ba
to othe
rela
Screen Home Pages
Some screens have home pages that provide quick a
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 51/1241
Some screens have home pages that provide quick a
common end-user tasks and data
Links to
different sets
of records
Guid
com
Links to
recentrecords
Navigating
Click the different UI elements to navigate to different
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 52/1241
Click the different UI elements to navigate to different
Link bar
View tabs
Row indicator
Screen tabs
Selected record
Views
A view consists of one or more applets displaying rec
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 53/1241
A view consists of one or more applets displaying rec
View tab
Drop-Down Menu Screen and View Navigation
Access additional tabs and links using drop-down arro
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 54/1241
Access additional tabs and links using drop down arro
Available if needed for screen tabs, link bar, and view ta
Click drop-do
to display mochoices
Drill down on a hyperlink to see more information
Hyperlinks
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 55/1241
Drill down on a hyperlink to see more information
...navigates you to the
Account Detail -
Contacts view
Clicking account
hyperlink…
List Applets and Form Applets
Views are made up of one or more applets
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 56/1241
Views are made up of one or more applets
List applet displays records in rows
Form applet displays a single record in a two-dimensio
Selected record
Navigating List Applets and Form Applets
Use the Menu button or scroll bars and arrows
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 57/1241
Right-click fo
menu
Form appletnavigation arro
Applet-specific menu items
Standard applet
buttons
Freezing List Columns
Freeze position in list columns
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 58/1241
p
Freeze columns by double-clicking column headers wit
applets
Enhances ability to work effectively with lists that contain
columns of data Drag and drop columns in and out of the frozen area
Double-click column
header to freeze (or
unfreeze) columnsScrolling horizo
through colum
leaves froze
columns in pl
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 59/1241
Displaying More Records Click the Show More button in the top-right corner of a
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 60/1241
p g
applet to toggle display of more records
Setting User Preferences Allows users to set individual preferences for some ap
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 61/1241
features
Set time zone preferences
Set a startup view
Change default spell check options
Customize aspects of the calendar Select User Prefere
from the application
Tools menu
New sc
appeaLink bar
categorizes
preferences
Module Highlights A Siebel application consists of Web pages that displa
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 62/1241
A screen is a grouping of views in a major application
area
A view consists of one or more applets as well as link
used to navigate within the view
A list applet displays multiple records in table form
A form applet displays a single record
Lab In the lab you will:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 63/1241
Practice navigating in Siebel Call Center
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 64/1241
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 65/1241
Module 3: Working With Siebel Data
Module Objectives After completing this module you should be able to:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 66/1241
Create, modify, and delete records
Query for records in a Siebel CRM application
Why you need to know:
Knowing these skills is important for understanding an
configuring Siebel applications
Working with Data in the Siebel User Interface (U
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 67/1241
Modifying and Saving Data
Using Picklists and Multi-Value Groups
Sorting Data
Creating Data
Deleting Data
Creating Data Select Menu > New Record or click the New button t
d
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 68/1241
new record
Creating DataContinued
Enter data in list or form applet
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 69/1241
Some fields are required:
Marked with a red asterisk in a form applet
Default value may be provided automatically
Required field
indicated by red
asterisk
Required field
populated with
default value
Modifying and Saving Data Modify data
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 70/1241
Select field in the list or form and change it
Save data implicitly
Step off the record in a list or a form to commit it to the
Available in High Interactivity interface
Save data explicitly
Click Menu and select Save Record
Keyboard: CTRL+S
Explicit save
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 71/1241
Attachments
Are files created in other applications that can be as
records in Siebel applications
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 72/1241
records in Siebel applications
Can be related to records wherever the Attachments
available within a screen
Drag and drop a file into the Attachments list view, or
Use the New File or New URL button
Use New F
URL to c
attachDrag and drop file to
create an attachment
Using Picklists
Picklists allow user to select a field value from a list
T t f i kli t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 73/1241
Two types of picklist:
Static: User selects a value from a fixed drop-down lis
Dynamic: User selects a value from list of changing va
Examples: Accounts, Opportunities, Contacts
Dynamic picklist
Select button
opens pick applet
Sta
uses
Multi-value groups (MVGs) assign one or more value
in a record
Using Multi-Value Groups
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 74/1241
in a record
Only the primary value will be displayed in a list or fo
MVG Select button
Associate members
to the account team
Sorting Data
Click a column header to sort data in ascending or d
order
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 75/1241
order
Click the column header for ascending
(A – Z) or descending (Z – A) order
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 76/1241
Deleting Data
Delete a record by:
Select Menu > Delete Record
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 77/1241
Select Menu > Delete Record
Click Delete button
CTRL+D
Some records may be read-only
Confirm delete
Querying for Data in the Siebel UI
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 78/1241
Using the Query Assistant
Querying an MVG Field
Refining a Query
Running and Executing a Query
Saving a Query
Executing Predefined and Saved Queries
Running and Executing a Query
Query for records inline within a form or list applet us
the following methods:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 79/1241
the following methods:
Query button on an applet
Query from applet-level and application-level menus
Run Query item in context menu (accessed by right-c
Rig
con
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 80/1241
Query Operators
Relational operators can be used on numeric or date
< (less than)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 81/1241
(less than)
> (greater than)
= (equal to)
<= (less than or equal to)
>= (greater than or equal to)
<> (not equal to) can be used on all fields
Example:
Find dates on or after 1/1/2006
Date field in query is set to: >= 1/1/2006
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 82/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 83/1241
Using the Query Assistant
Provides a simplified way for users to execute querie
anywhere in a Siebel application
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 84/1241
Guides users through creating a query
Users do not have to be familiar with query syntax or
Click Query Assistant button after clicking Query in a
Select any field
from the current
screen
Select fields a
operators usin
drop-down lis
Tw
com
f
Querying an MVG Field
Use EXISTS() to search for matches in multi-value g
(MVGs)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 85/1241
Only way to query all child records in an MVG
Example: Searching for the string “*Street” in the addr
account An account can have multiple addresses
Query matches all accounts with one or more addresses
the sub-string “Street”
MVG indicator
Search criterion
Querying an MVG Field Continued
Search results show records where at least one valu
MVG matches the search criteria
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 86/1241
Example:
Search results include accounts with string “*Street” in a
address
Th
ha
m
Record
detail for
Ace
Properties
Use Refine Query to modify an existing query
Refining a Query
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 87/1241
1. Select Refine Query
3. Query results reflect
original and modified criteria
2. Enter additional
or modified criteria Original criterion
Saving a Query
Use the application-level Query menu to save a que
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 88/1241
1. Select Query > Save
Query As
2. Name the query and click OK
Executing Predefined and Saved Queries
Predefined queries are provided by an application ad
Cannot be deleted by an end user
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 89/1241
Additional saved queries are created and saved by t
All saved and predefined queries appear in the Save
drop-down list
Created and
Predefined and
saved queries in
alphabetical
order
Module Highlights
Creating and editing data may involve using:
Required and optional fields
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 90/1241
Drop-down lists
MVG fields
Attachments
Siebel applications support complex queries on data
Wildcards
Logical and numerical operators
Support for searching multi-value group (MVG) fields
The Query Assistant helps end users form complex q
Commonly-executed queries may be saved
Lab
In the lab you will:
Create, modify, and delete records
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 91/1241
Use basic querying skills
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 92/1241
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 93/1241
Module 4: Responsibilities andViews
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 94/1241
Business Challenge
Large-scale enterprise applications should not grant a
access to the entire application, for example:
Most users should not have access to system administ
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 95/1241
Most users should not have access to system administ
Most users should not have access to all data in the ap
for example:
Employee salaries, sales contracts, and other sensitive d
Data not related to the employee’s job function
Application administrators require a mechanism to res
access to views and data
Ideally, the restriction mechanisms should be independ
another:
One mechanism to restrict access to views
A separate mechanism to restrict access to data
Business Solution: Access Control
Siebel applications provide mechanisms known as Ac
Control to restrict views and data seen by users
Responsibilities control access to views
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 96/1241
Responsibilities control access to views
Subject of this module
Positions control access to data Subject of subsequent module
These Access Control mechanisms are independent of
another
Views and Job Functions
Users should see only those views required to perform
functions
Improves efficiency for the user
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 97/1241
Improves efficiency for the user
Improves business security by preventing unauthorized
sensitive or administrative views
The System Administrator has many more administrative views th
Call Center Agent. Notice that even the set of screen tabs is diffe
System Administrator Call Cen
Responsibilities
Are collections of views associated with a job function
All of the views necessary to perform that particular job
Are assigned to users according to their job functions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 98/1241
Are assigned to users according to their job functions
Users may have more than one job function, hence m
more than one responsibility
UResponsibilitiesViews
Responsibilitiescontain one or
more views
Assign usersone or more
responsibilities
Properties of Responsibilities
A view may be contained in multiple responsibilities
For example, the Home Page View of an application sh
included in every responsibility used to access that app
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 99/1241
included in every responsibility used to access that app
Multiple users may share the same responsibility
For example, Call Center agents
UResponsibilitiesViews
The same view may becontained by multiple
responsibilities
Multiple users mshare the same
responsibility
Seed Responsibilities
Are a set of responsibilities provided with the Siebel a
Automatically created during application installation
Cannot be modified or deleted
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 100/1241
Cannot be modified or deleted
May be copied to create new, editable responsibilities
Seed responsibilities
are created when the
application is installed
Creating New Responsibilities
If the existing seed responsibilities are not sufficient fo
business requirements, create new responsibilities as
New responsibilities may be edited or deleted
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 101/1241
New responsibilities may be edited or deleted
Create new responsibilities
for customized, editable
responsibilities
Assigning Responsibilities to Users
Assign responsibilities to users according to their job
Users with multiple responsibilities see the union of the
Users with no responsibilities see nothing
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 102/1241
Users with no responsibilities see nothing
Critical to remember to assign responsibilities to partners
customers
CCHENG h
responsibilities, an
all of the views
Click the Select up the Respo
Primary Responsibilities
Assign each user a primary responsibility
Determines the initial tab layout when the user logs in
Administrator determines the initial layout
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 103/1241
y
User can edit personal preferences to create a different la
CCHENG’s primary responsibility
is Universal Agent (B2B+B2C),
so she initially sees the tab layout
for that responsibility
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 104/1241
1. Copy or Create a Responsibility
Navigate to the Administration – Application > Respon
view
Copy an existing responsibility with a set of views sim
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 105/1241
py g p y
requirements
Alternatively, create a new responsibility to start withoviews
Right-click and select
Copy Record to create a
duplicate responsibility
1. Copying or Creating Responsibilities
Copying seed responsibilities:
Provides a “quick start” in creating responsibilities with
numbers of views
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 106/1241
May provide far more views than your business logic re
Seed responsibilities frequently contain hundreds of view
Inefficient for inexperienced users
May include inappropriate administrative views
Creating new responsibilities:
Allows fine-tuning of application logic to exactly match
requirements
Users see only those views that your company has decidrequire to perform their job functions
Requires determining exactly which views a user may r
adding those views to the responsibility
2. Add or Remove Views
Add or remove views from the responsibility as neces
A pick applet provides querying functionality and impr
efficiency when selecting views
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 107/1241
y g
1. Click Add to add
views to a responsibility
2. Pick a
querying
multiple
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 108/1241
2. Clear the Cache
Clear the responsibility cache to ensure that users wil
updated responsibilities the next time they log in
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 109/1241
Click Clear Cache to clear the
responsibility cache after creatingor modifying responsibilities
3. Test the Responsibility
Assign the responsibility to a sample user
Use the Administration – User > Users view
Log in as that user and verify the available views from
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 110/1241
Map
Users only see references to views that are contained responsibilities
Examine the Site Ma
that only views assoc
responsibility are
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 111/1241
Module Highlights
Responsibilities are collections of views used to limit th
visible to a user
Responsibilities have a M:M relationship with views an
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 112/1241
Create responsibilities by copying and editing seed
responsibilities or by creating new responsibilities Assign responsibilities to a user and clear the respons
cache before testing a responsibility
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 113/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 114/1241
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 115/1241
Module 5: Users, Positions, andOrganizations
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe how data access is controlled by users, position
organizations
Implement the company structure using divisions organi
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 116/1241
Implement the company structure using divisions, organi
positions, users, and employees
Why you need to know:
Access to some data within the application is controlled b
positions, and organizations
Implementing your company's structure enables role- and
organization-specific functionality in Siebel CRM
Business Challenge
Large-scale enterprise applications should not grant a
access to all of the data within the application
For example, sales representatives should see their ow
quota attainment but no one else’s
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 117/1241
quota attainment, but no one else s
On the other hand, sales managers should see all of th
quota attainments
System administrators require a mechanism to restric
data within the application
This mechanism should be independent of the mechan
restrict access to views
Business Solution: Access Control
Siebel applications allow different users to see differe
based on their user ID, position, or organization within
company
Data access control is independent of responsibilities a
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 118/1241
Data access control is independent of responsibilities a
Example: Ted Arnold and Casey Cheng can access the
based on their responsibilities, but see different data in
Users
Are individuals who use the Siebel application
May be employees, customers, or partners
Require unique user IDs
R i l ibili i i h
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 119/1241
Require at least one responsibility to see views in the
application Note that multiple users can
have the same name as long
as their user ID is different
Users m
lea
responsi
will see
Employees
Are a special type of user representing employees of
company
Employees have one or more positions within the comp
Each position belongs to an organization within the com
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 120/1241
Users
Each position belongs to an organization within the com
Employees
Employees are users who have
positions that belong to organizations
Responsibilities All users have
responsibilities, whether or
not they are employees
OrganizPositions
Positions
Positions are used to control access to data within the
application
For example, a sales representative’s accounts are onl
members of his or her sales team
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 121/1241
members of his or her sales team
Employees may have one or more positions
One position is designated as the primary position, and
position employees occupy when they log in
Employees only see data for their current position
Employees may change positions once they have logg
Changing Positions
If an employee has more than one position, he or she
change position during a session
From the application-level Tools menu, select User Pre
Change Position
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 122/1241
C a ge os o
Becomes the Active Position for that session
Changing the default login (primary) position for an em
an administrator function
Position Hierarchy
Positions are arranged in a hierarchy
Defines a reporting structure that allows managers to s
from their direct and indirect reports
The Administration Group > Positions view shows thi
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 123/1241
The Administration – Group > Positions view shows thi
Also shows the primary for each position
The VP of Sales position can see
data for the Eastern Sales Manager
and Eastern Sales Rep positions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 124/1241
Example: MegaCorp Organizational Structure
Here is a sample organizational structure of a sample
MegaCorp
MegaCorp HQ
Default Organization Default
Organization
the root of th
hi h
All divisions belonging to
D f lt O i ti h
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 125/1241
MegaCorp
Training
MegaCorp HQ
MegaCorp
Sales
NA Sales EMEASales
Internal
TrainingCustomer
Training
FinancialServices
PubSec
PartnerSales
European
Partners
ASIA/PAC
Partners
Mega
Cons
hierarchy
Partner organizations
created to segregate
data
Default Organization share
the same data access
Positions and Divisions
A position is assigned to one, and only one, division
A position is associated with one, and only one, organ
The organization to which the division belongs
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 126/1241
This position is associated with
the MegaCorp East Sales
division, which belongs to the
Default Organization
The Eastern Sa
position is assMegaCorp East
Example: NA Sales with Positions and Users
The NA Sales division (part of Default Organization) m
users and positions that look something like this:
MegaCorp NA Sales L
VP f S l
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 127/1241
MegaCorp East SaleMegaCorp West Sales
Eastern Sales
Manager
Peter Summers
Western
Sales Rep 1
Todd Oleak
Western
Sales Rep 2
Marion May
Western Sales
Manager
Sean Murphy
Eastern
Sales Rep 1
Kelly Wilson
Easter
Re
Wasaka
VP of Sales
Chris Miller O
MegaCorp West Sales MegaCorp East Sale
Implementing the Company Structure
1. Create Divisions and Division Hierarchy
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 128/1241
2. Label Some Divisions as Organizations
3. Create Positions
4. Create Employees
5. Create Users
1. Create Divisions and Division Hierarchy
Create divisions in the Administration – Group > Inter
Divisions view
Required fields are division name and currency
Be careful: Once divisions are created they cannot be d
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 129/1241
y
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 130/1241
3. Create Positions
Create Positions on the Administration – Group > Pos
Positions require a name and a division
Siebel applications provide some seed positions such
Administrator
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 131/1241
Recommended practice: Do not delete positions, as t
related to data
The Siebel application has four seed
positions, including Siebel Administrator
4. Create Employees
Use the Administration – User > Employees view to c
employees
Employee will also appear as a user
Required fields are First Name, Last Name, User ID,
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 132/1241
and Organization
By default, new employee records are in the same org
as the person creating the record
Used for access control of visibility of employee record
Can be changed to reflect appropriate access control
5. Create Users
Some users will not be employees
For examples, customers and partners
Create them in the Administration – Users > Users vie
Customers and partners require responsibilities, but no
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 133/1241
p q p
Module Highlights
Users are individuals who log in to the application
Require responsibilities
Employees are special users representing employees
company
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 134/1241
Hold at least one position
Belong to at least one organization
Positions are similar to job titles, and are used to deter
data an employee can see
Divisions represent divisions within the company
Organizations are specialized divisions used to limit da
Lab
In the lab you will:
Implement a company structure, including divisions, org
positions, and employees
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 135/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 136/1241
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 137/1241
Module 6: Controlling Access to
Customer Data
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe the difference between customer and master da
applications
Describe the different Access Control mechanisms used
access to data in Siebel applications
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 138/1241
access to data in Siebel applications
Identify the different view types used for different types o
Why you need to know:
To effectively use and administer Siebel applications, you
understand how access to data is controlled
Understanding view types is essential to properly assignresponsibilities
Business Challenge
Users often perform the same job functions but on dif
of data
For example, sales representatives need access to the
their own accounts, but not each others’
Access to some data in the enterprise needs to be res
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 139/1241
Access to some data in the enterprise needs to be res
Users should only see records they need to do their job
Users should easily locate records of interest
Business Solution: Access Control for Data
Siebel applications provide mechanisms to restrict ac
certain records based on:
The employee
The employee's position
Th iti ’ i ti
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 140/1241
The position’s organization
Limited access to data:
Increases business security
Increases user productivity
Relationship Between Views and Data
Access to views is independent of access to data
But the view defines the Access Control mechanism th
used to access data
Data displayed within a view is based on the Access C
mechanism for the view
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 141/1241
mechanism for the view
Example: Ted Arnold and Casey Cheng can access thebased on their responsibilities, but see different data in
Casey Cheng
(CCHENG) sees
only her own
service requests
Ted Arnold
(TARNOLD) can
access the same view
but sees only his own
service requests there
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 142/1241
Accessing Customer Data
Individual records may be restricted by employee, posorganization, or a combination thereof
Data visibility is determined by Siebel-set properties of
underlying business component (BC)
Visibility may be restricted to an individual employee p
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 143/1241
Visibility may be restricted to an individual employee, p
organization, or multiple employees, positions, or organ
Employees are
assigned to
positions. Each
position is
assigned to one
and only oneorganization
Record visibility is restricted by a combinat
position, and organization, depending on th
Records
Employee
Position
Organization
Viewing Customer Data
For customer data that is access controlled, visibility idetermined using the following drop-down visibility filt
My views
My Team’s views
All views
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 144/1241
All views
All Across My Organizations views
All Across Organizations views
Assigning the appropriate views to the appropriate
responsibilities is critical for data access control
The visibility filter dro
down list shows the vie
available according to
user’s responsibilitie
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 145/1241
My Personal Views
Are used to display records directly owned by you or yposition
Are special-case views that are rarely used (for exam
Contacts)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 146/1241
A sales agent onsees contacts fo
which he or she
the direct owne
My Team’s Views
Are an additional view for managers that allow them trecords assigned to their direct and indirect reports
For records with teams of positions, only records where
primary is the direct or indirect report are displayed
Manager does not have to be assigned to the record
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 147/1241
g g
Are typically assigned only to manager responsibilitie Are implemented using the position hierarchy
Manager sees only the acc
for which the manager’s d
or indirect reports are th
primary position on the acc
All Views
Are used to show all records belonging to your currenorganization
The organization of your current position
Not related to My or My Team’s views, which are perso
position oriented
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 148/1241
p
A service age
the service
assigned to
organiz
regardless of
Customer Data and Organizations
By default, when a record is created it is associated worganization of the creator’s current position
To change the organization associated with a record,
More Info view
Records may be associated with multiple organizations
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 149/1241
Records may be associated with multiple organizations
A record’s Organ
usually shown unde
Info tab in the de
All Across My Organizations Views
Are used to display all data from an organization and organizations
Based on the relationships specified by the organizatio
hierarchy
Are typically restricted to users who need to access re
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 150/1241
yp y
the enterprise level Mid-level executives
Partners
Are typically used for only a few types of records
For example, opportunities
In the All Opportunities Across My Organizations view, manager sees all opportunities in his or her organizatio
its child organizations
All Across Organizations Views
Are used to show all records in the enterprise that arean organization
Are typically restricted to only those users who need t
records across the whole company
Top-level executives
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 151/1241
p
A vice
sales
service r
have be
Administration Views
Are used to display all database records, even those valid owner
For example, records that have just been imported but
assigned or records where the primary position has bee
Are accessed from the Administration views for each
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 152/1241
entity Should be restricted to a few users in the enterprise a
display all records in the database
Administration view
separate from the v
filter drop-down
Summary: Types of Views
Displays records directly assigned to you based o
active positionMy View
Only displays records you directly ownMy Personal View
DescriptionViews
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 153/1241
Allows managers to see records assigned to theirindirect reports that are the primary owner based
structure
My Team’s View (Manager’s View)
Displays all records associated with the user’s org All View
Displays records that are assigned to the user’s o
and its child organizations All Across My Organizations View
Display all records in the database, even those w
organization Administration Views
Displays all records in the enterprise with a valid o All Across Organizations View
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 154/1241
Best Practices for Views Continued
All Views: Individual contributors may or may not need access
Call center agents should be able to see all of a company
requests, hence should have an All Service Requests vie
Sales representatives may or may not need to see all opp
within their organization depending on the business mod
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 155/1241
within their organization, depending on the business mod
All views are typically restricted to users who need to a
records at the organization level
Executives, administrators
Service agents who need to access all service requests
All Across Organizations Views:
These views are usually reserved for upper managers executives
Exception: Call center agents may need to see all service
filed by a customer worldwide, hence may need access to
Review: Access to Customer Data
Can be restricted by assigning individual records to: Employees (specified by employee’s user ID)
Positions
Organizations
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 156/1241
Using Multiple Access Control Mechanisms
A record can be restricted by more than one Access Cmechanism
Mechanisms are not mutually exclusive
Each view is preconfigured to use only one mechanis
If you want to use another mechanism, you create and
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 157/1241
another view
Examples
An employee’s position may be assigned to an accounot assigned to that employee’s organization
Employee sees the account in the My View
Employee does not see the account in the All View
Contacts have multiple access mechanisms: public (t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 158/1241
based), private (position- or employee-based), and m Employee sees public contacts in the My View
Employee sees private contacts in the My Personal Vie
Manager sees contacts for self and subordinates in the
View
Summary of Record Assignment
Standard Siebel business entities can be assigned to multiple employees, positions, or organizations
Multi-Valued
Access
Single-Valued
AccessAccess Method
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 159/1241
Accounts
Opportunities
Quotes
Assets
Consumers
Forecasts
Organizations
Accounts
Contacts
Opportunities
Forecasts
QuotesPositions
Assets
Activities
Service requests
Expense reports
Contacts
Employees
AccessAccess
Module Highlights
Access to records may be restricted by employee, posorganization, or a combination thereof
Which records are shown depends on the view selecte
visibility filter drop-down list
Multiple Access Control mechanisms may be in place
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 160/1241
record For example, both position-based and organization-base
Control
Lab
In the lab you will: Explore record visibility in the application
Add a position to a user an examine how it affects the
visibility filters
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 161/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 162/1241
Module 7: Catalogs and Master Data
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 163/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 164/1241
Business Challenge
Companies have large amounts of data that must be: Classified, so that it is easy to organize, administer, na
search
Controlled, so that users only have access to appropria
Example: Companies want different sales divisions to
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 165/1241
access to different product lists
Business Solution
Siebel applications provide mechanisms for: Organizing and classifying large amounts of static, refe
Organizing users into groups for appropriate access to
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 166/1241
Master Data
Is static, referential data managed by administrators Products
Solutions
Literature
Resolution items
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 167/1241
Auction items Events
Decision issues
Competitors
Training courses
Has its visibility controlled by: Catalogs
Categories
Access groups
Catalogs
Are containers for hierarchies of categories Do not contain master data themselves
Are created to contain a specific subset of the master
For example, customer documentation for credit card a
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 168/1241
Category A Category B Category C
Catalog A
• Product 4
• Product 5
Subcategory A
Subcategor
Subcategor
• Literature I
• Product 1
• Product 2
• Product 3
• Literature Item 1
• Product 2• Literature Item 2
• Product 3
• Product 6
Catalogs Continued
May be declared public or private Public catalogs are visible to all users
Categories within public catalogs may still be marked priv
Private catalogs have their visibility limited to privileged
known as access groups
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 169/1241
For example, a credit card documentation catalog migpublic to allow users to see the service agreements a
However, a customer service documentation catalog
private to restrict visibility to those with service agreem
Catalog A (Public) Catalog B (Privat
A public catalog is visible to all users;
individual categories within that
catalog may still be marked private
Categories within
catalogs are pr
Catalog Types
Are assigned to catalogs Catalogs should have a catalog type
Seed catalog types include:
Infocenter
Buying
Partner
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 170/1241
eService FAQ
Customer
Multiselect Checkbox
Training
Partner Program
Training Curriculum
Are used when querying for master data
Categories
Are nodes in a catalog that contain: Master data
Other categories
Are not shared between catalogs
However, multiple catalogs may contain categories wit
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 171/1241
name May be declared public or private
If a category is declared private, all of its subcategories
private
Private categories also have their visibility limited to sp
access groups
Categories: Example
Even though Category B and Category C both containsubcategories named Subcategory A, these two subc
are distinct
Since Category B is private, its Subcategory A is also
Category B has been
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 172/1241
Category A Category B Category C
Catalog A
• Product 4
• Product 5
Subcategory A
Subcategor
Subcategor
• Literature I
• Product 1
• Product 2
• Product 3
• Literature Item 1
• Product 2
• Literature Item 2
• Product 3
• Product 6
marked as private
Access Groups
Are collections of positions, organizations, user lists, ahouseholds used to access private catalogs and cate
Cannot contain individuals such as employees and us
To add an individual, create a user list with that individu
only member
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 173/1241
Create User Lists in the Administratio
– Group > User Lists screen and add
them to access groups
Access Group Hierarchies
Access groups can be organized into a hierarchy Child access groups inherit all of the access granted to
parents, hence have more privileges than their parents
Useful for giving more privileged users greater access
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 174/1241
Parent access gro
Child access groups
Access Control
Assign access groups to catalogs or categories Unlike customer data, individual records are not contro
Access groups must be assigned to every catalog or c
which they need access
Access is not inherited along the category hierarchy
C t l A A i A G X
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 175/1241
Category A Category B Category C
Catalog A
• Product 4
• Product 5
Subcategory A
Subcategor
Subcategor
• Literature I
• Product 1
• Product 2
• Product 3
• Literature Item 1
• Product 2
• Literature Item 2
• Product 3
• Product 6
Assign Access Group Xto Category B
Also assign Access
Group X to subcategory
A if access is required
Access Control Continued
An access group can only be added to a category if: The access group is also assigned to the category’s pa
The access group is a child of an access group assigne
parent
Catalog A Assign any access group to C
because its parent (Catalog A
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 176/1241
Category A Category B Category C
• Product 4
• Product 5
Subcategory A
Subcategor
Subcategor• Literature I
• Product 1
• Product 2
• Product 3
• Literature Item 1
• Product 2
• Literature Item 2
• Product 3
• Product 6
Cannot assign Access
Group Y to Subcategory
A unless…
… Access Group Y is assigned to
Category B, or…
… Access Group Y is the child of
access group assigned to Categor
Access Control Continued
Removing a parent access group from a category alsoall child access groups from all subcategories
Example: Suppose Access Group Y is a child of Acce
Group X
Catalog A
Removing Access Group X
from Category B
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 177/1241
Category A Category B Category C Catalog A
• Product 4
• Product 5
Subcategory A
Subcategor
Subcategor
• Literature I
• Product 1
• Product 2
• Product 3
• Literature Item 1
• Product 2• Literature Item 2
• Product 3
• Product 6
… removes Access Group Y from
Subcategory A
from Category B…
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 178/1241
1. Create the Catalog
Navigate to Administration – Catalog > Catalogs Create a new catalog
Specify a name
Specify a catalog type
Specify other options
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 179/1241
By default, the catalog is
active; mark it as inactive to
make it unavailable, for
example, during updates
Specify seque
to change the o
catalogs
2. Add Categories to the Catalog
Drill down on the catalog name in the Catalog view toto the Categories view
Add categories to the catalog
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 180/1241
Use buttons to
promote and
demote
subcategories
Drill down on a
catalog to see
its categories
3. Associate Master Data with Categories
Select the appropriate tab in the Categories view to adata to a category
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 181/1241
For exa
select
Literature
add pro
literat
4. Declare Catalogs or Categories Private
Set the Private flag at the catalog or category level to data access
Subcategories are automatically marked as private
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 182/1241
Marking t
category a
automatically
Premium an
Customers cbe marked
5. Create Access Groups
Navigate to Administration – Group > Access Groups Create the access group hierarchy as required
Create parents, then children
Specify parents for child records
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 183/1241
Specify the parent access gro
creating the child access gro
requires creating the paren
5. Create Access Groups Continued
Add positions, organizations, or user lists to access g
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 184/1241
Click New to add parties
to an access group
Group type
Position, Orga
User List, or H
6. Assign Access Groups
Assign access groups to catalogs or categories Use the Cascade button to automatically assign an acc
to all child categories
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 185/1241
Add access groups using
the Access Group tab under
Categories or Catalogs
Select an Access GroupCascade to assign that
group to all child cate
Access Control Summary
ViewsDetermined by
Responsibility
Access ControlControls access to
Data
Customer Data
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 186/1241
PositionsDetermined by
Position
Examples:
Accounts
Opportunities
ContactsCampaigns
Master Data
• Is static, read-only material to
• Is created and maintained by
administrators
• Access is controlled at the Ca
Cate or level
Customer Data
• Is dynamic and transactional (can be updated)
• Is created and managed by users of the
application
• Access is controlled at the record level
Personal OwnershipDetermined by
UserID
Examples:
Service Requests
Product Defects
Activities
OrganizationsDetermined by
Organization
Examples:
Accounts
Opportunities
ContactsCampaigns
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 187/1241
Lab
In the lab you will: Navigate catalogs, categories, and access groups
Restrict access to master data contained in categories
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 188/1241
Module 8: The Siebel Web
Architecture
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 189/1241
Architecture
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to: Identify the pieces that make up the Siebel Web architec
Identify the role of each piece of the architecture
Describe how Siebel requests are processed
Why you need to know: P id f d ti f d t di th l ti hi
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 190/1241
Why you need to know: Provides a foundation for understanding the relationship
the Siebel software components
Siebel Web Architecture Overview
At a high level, the Siebel Web architecture consists o Siebel Web Clients that access and display the busines
A Gateway Name Server that stores configuration infor
A Web server that handles interactions with the Web C
distributes requests to the Siebel Servers
Servers that manage the business data and provide ba
interactive services for clients
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 191/1241
A relational database and file system that store busines
Siebel Web Client Web Server
Sieb
Na
Database
Server
Enterprise
Siebel File
System
Siebel Server(s)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 192/1241
Web Server
Identifies and passes Siebel requests from Siebel Weto the Siebel Servers
Passes completed HTML application pages back to S
Clients
Provides load balancing for multi-server installations
Supports either built-in or third-party load balancing
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 193/1241
pp p y g
Siebel Web Client Web Server
Sieb
Na
Database
Server
Enterprise
Siebel File
System
Siebel Server(s)
Siebel Gateway Name Server
Is a Windows service or UNIX daemon process Stores component definitions and assignments, opera
parameters, and connectivity information
For example, connect strings to query servers for
server/component availability
Information stored in siebns.dat file on Gateway Name
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 194/1241
Siebel Web Client Web Server
Sieb
Na
Database
Server
Enterprise
Siebel File
System
Siebel Server(s)
Siebel Enterprise
Is a logical collection of Siebel Servers that support usaccess a single database server and the Siebel file sy
Logically groups Siebel Servers for common administ
Siebel Server Manager
Supports sharing of common configuration informatio
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 195/1241
Siebel Web Client Web Server
Sieb
Na
Database
Server
Enterprise
Siebel File
System
Siebel Server(s)
Siebel Servers
Execute tasks to manage the business data
Programs known as server components perform specif
or jobs for the server
For example:
Importing and exporting data
Configuring the database to monitor for user-defined cond
Processing of client requests
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 196/1241
Tasks may run interactively, in the background, or as b
Siebel Web Client Web Server
Sieb
Na
Database
Server
Enterprise
Siebel File
System
Siebel Server(s)
Examples of Server Components
The application object manager (OM) is a server com
that provides the environment in which Siebel user se
Users interact with an application-specific OM; for exam
Siebel Call Center Object Manager (SCCObjMgr)
Runs in interactive mode
The Workflow Monitor Agent periodically checks the s
determine whether workflows or assignments need to
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 197/1241
Runs in background mode
Enterprise Integration Manager performs data imports
exports
Runs in batch mode
Siebel File System
Is one or more shared directories that store files used
applications
Files are compressed in a proprietary format to save sp
provide security
Examples: Product literature, sales tools, presentations
profiles
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 198/1241
Siebel Web Client Web Server
Sieb
Na
Database
Server
Enterprise
Siebel File
System
Siebel Server(s)
Database Server
Stores data used by Siebel applications in a predefine
database schema
Single database for Enterprise provides data consisten
Data is accessed by components through a data mana
Supports a variety of third-party relational database
management systems (RDBMS)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 199/1241
Siebel Web Client Web Server
Sieb
Na
Database
Server
Enterprise
Siebel File
System
Siebel Server(s)
Web Usage Login Scenario
Siebel Web Client (browser) sends the URL to the We
URL specifies:
Either HTTP or HTTPS protocol
Web server machine name
Application and language
URL initially connects to a Siebel-specific virtual direc
Web server
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 200/1241
Virtual directories are created as part of the Siebel inst
1. Browser sends
URL to Web server
Siebel Web Client
<browser >
Web Server
<websrvr1>
Virtual Directory
[/callcenter_enu]
http://websrvr1/callcenter_enu
2. Connects to the virtual directo
on the specified Web server
Web Usage Login Scenario Continued
Virtual directory forwards request to the Siebel Web S
Extension (SWSE) installed on the Web server
SWSE uses the eapps.cfg configuration file to obtain
parameters
Siebel Web Client
<browser >
3. Virtual directory
specifies to use SWSE
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 201/1241
Web Server
<websrvr1>
Virtual Directory
[/callcenter_enu] SWSE Eapps.cfg
4. SWSE locates the requestedsection in eapps.cfg
Web Usage Login Scenario Continued
Eapps.cfg specifies the location of the server, server c
broker port, Enterprise, and Object Manager informat
initial connection
For multi-server installations provides load balancing in
Also provides generic login information for initial “anony
access to database
5. eapps.cfg specifiesconnect string values
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 202/1241
Siebel Server <EMEJHG20>
Enterprise – <Siebel>
Web Server
<websrvr>
Object Manager
SCCObjMgr_enu
Web Usage Login Scenario Continued
Object Manager reads an application-specific configu
and component parameters, which specify the applica
location of the Siebel Repository File (SRF), and so fo
Siebel Repository File is a separate binary file that defi
more Siebel applications
Discussed in greater detail in subsequent modules
Most configuration information is specified by componeparameters rather than in the configuration file
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 203/1241
parameters rather than in the configuration file
Siebel Server
Enterprise <Siebel>
DatabaseServer
Database
Server
Object Manager
SCCObjMgr_enu
CFG SRF
Siebel Gateway
Name Server
6. Object Manager reads
CFG file on server and
component parameters from
Gateway Name Server
Web Usage Login Scenario Continued
Object Manager retrieves data through data manager
The Siebel Web Engine (SWE), part of the Object Ma
reads a set of Web templates that are stored on the S
Server and creates HTML pages for the data requeste
Siebel Web Templates (SWT) are a set of template file
specify how to render the UI in the user’s browser
HTML files with embedded Siebel tags defining content
E t i <Si b l>
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 204/1241
Siebel Server
Object Manager
SWE
SWT
Databa
Serve
Databa
Serve
8. SW
Web T
and
HTM
Enterprise <Siebel>
CFG SRF
HTML login
page
7. OM retrieve
through data man
Web Usage Login Scenario Continued
Siebel Call Center
The Object Manager sends the completed Web page
Web server, which passes it back to the Siebel Web C
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 205/1241
Web Server
<websrvr1>
Siebel Server <SS1>
Enterprise – <Siebel>
Object Manager
SCCObjMgr_enu
HTML login
page
Physical Architecture
The Siebel Gateway Name Server, Siebel Server, daserver, and File System can be implemented on one
or spread across multiple machines
SWSE can be on that machine for development or test
environments
The Siebel Server(s) should have a high-speed LAN
connection to the database server H
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 206/1241
Siebel Gateway
Name Server
Enterprise Server
FirewallFirewall
Web Server
SWSE Siebel Server
Siebel Server
Module Highlights
A Siebel Web Client displays the Siebel application in
Web browser
A Siebel Web Server is a third-party Web server with t
Web Server Extension (SWSE) installed and the Siebe
application virtual directories created
A Siebel Gateway Name Server stores parameters and
connection information for Siebel Servers
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 207/1241
A Siebel Enterprise is a logical collection of Siebel Ser
A Siebel Server is a set of processes that manage pro
all Siebel clients
Lab
In the lab you will:
Examine the virtual directories and eapps.cfg
Verify the information contained in the files against info
retrieved from the application
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 208/1241
Module 9: Server Components and
Parameters
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 209/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Define component groups
Define components
Describe parameters as inputs for components
Describe the various levels at which you can set param
how to set them
Describe named subsystems and job templates
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 210/1241
Why you need to know:
Server behavior is controlled by components and param
hence an understanding of how to find and configure th
essential
Review: Siebel Web Architecture
The Siebel Web architecture consists of a Web Client
server, Gateway Name Server, and Enterprise contai
more Siebel Servers
Each Siebel Server includes its own set of components
that run on the server to provide application functionalit
Siebel Web Client Web Server
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 211/1241
Siebel Web Client Web Server
Sieb
Na
Database
Server
Enterprise
Siebel File
System
Siebel Server(s)
Examining the Siebel Enterprise
View the Siebel Enterprise hierarchy using the Enterp
Explorer View of the Server Administration – Configur
screen
1 This Siebel 2 The first server listed
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 212/1241
1. This Siebel
Enterprise is
named Siebel
2. The first server listed
in the enterprise is
OUsrvr
3. OUsrvr has these
components available
Component Groups
Are logical groupings of components
Components are enabled or disabled in groups
Support major functional areas of the application
For example, Siebel Call Center, Siebel Remote, or As
Management
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 213/1241
The Enterprise Explorer lists the
available component groups
The detail pane provides addition
such as the number of component
Enabling and Assigning Component Groups
1. Enable the Component Group for the Enterprise
2. Assign the Component Group to the Server
3. Enable the Component Group on the Server
There are three steps to enable a component group o
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 214/1241
1. Enable the Component Group for the Enterpris
Click the Enable or Disable buttons in the detail pane
Enterprise Explorer to enable or disable component g
By default, most component groups are enabled for the
Components within disabled component groups are no
on any of the servers in the enterprise
Best Practice: Disable component groups which will n
used on any server Enabled component groups take a small amount of res
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 215/1241
Enabled component groups take a small amount of res
the Siebel Gateway Name Server
Click the appropriate button to
Disable a component group for t
2. Assign the Component Group to the Server
In Administration – Server Configuration > Enterprise
the component group and server and click Assign
Stores component group information on the Siebel Gat
Server
Allocates memory for the component group on the Sieb
Name Server
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 216/1241
3. Click2. Select server
1. Select component
group to assign
3. Enable the Component Group on the Server
Once you have assigned a component group to a ser
or disable it on the server
By default, assigning a component group automatically
Best practice: Assign and disable component groups
are not using now but may use in the future on that se
Select the desired server and click the Enable or Disa
Enabling allocates memory on the server for that comp
The component group is now available to the server
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 217/1241
The component group is now available to the server
Click Enable to enable component group on the s
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 218/1241
Manage Individual Components
Specify startup behavior for individual components
Auto Start: The component automatically starts up whe
Server service starts
Manual Start: The component must be started manuall
Prevents component from consuming memory or process
is needed
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 219/1241
Click Manual Start under Ad
– Server Configuration > Se
the component to manu
Executing Components
When a component executes, it is called a task
Multiple instances of the same component may run sim
Components execute in one of three modes:
Batch components run once until completion
Batch component executions are also called jobs
Usually initiated by user action, event, or workflow
For example, data loads or database extracts
Background components run continuously in the backg
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 220/1241
g p y g
Periodically “wake up” and execute
For example, transaction processor for tracking changes
database
Interactive components run in response to client reques
For example, application object managers
Component Parameters
Are input arguments for tasks
Are set at one of five levels:
Enterprise parameters are
set throughout the enterprise
Server parameters are set at
the individual server level
Component Definitionparameters are specific to a
t b t t i
ComponentDefinition
parameters
Server
Component
parameters
Server
parameters
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 221/1241
component, but enterprise-
wide
Server Component
parameters allow a server to
override a componentdefinition
Task parameters are for an
individual component when it
p
Enterprise
parameters
Not shown: Task
are set when sta
hence do not ap
Enterprise E
Hidden and Advanced Parameters
More advanced parameters are classified as hidden o
advanced
Click the appropriate button to see these parameters
Click the Reset button to return to the normal set of pa
Click Adv
Hidden to se
or hidden p
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 222/1241
Component Definitions
Are sets of parameters associated with a component
determine its behavior when it is run Set enterprise-wide, so that the component performs th
matter which server it is run on
Reconfigure definitions to modify component behavio
Duplicate definitions to create new component definiti
Creates a duplicate component with a new name and aset of input parameters
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 223/1241
Modify pa
or dupl
definition t
new com
with differ
param
Parameter Inheritance
Parameters are set at any of five levels
Parameters set at any level are inherited at all lower lev
For example, parameters set at the enterprise level are i
the levels below it
Parameters set at any level override parameters set at
level
For example, parameters set when starting a task overrid
at higher levels
E t i
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 224/1241
Server Server
EnterpriseEnterprise
Component DefinitionComponent Definition
TaskTask
Server ComponentServer Component
Highest level
Lowest level
Removing Parameters
Do not attempt to delete parameters by setting their v
zero or null Causes zero or null value to be passed to component
Use Delete Parameter Override to remove parameter
a given level
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 225/1241
Selec
Paramet
to remove
va
Profiles
Are sets of parameters that may be used by multiple
components Also referred to as “named subsystems”
Are edited to modify behavior of multiple components
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 226/1241
For example, the set of parameters used to send em
alerts to administrators is used by multiple componen
Modify the profile parameters
to change the behavior of all
components using this profile
Job Templates
Job templates are predefined sets of parameters for u
batch components Recall: When a batch component is executed it is calle
Multiple job templates can exist for the same compon
For example, weekly assignments versus daily assignm
Both assignment jobs run the same component; only the
parameters is different Unlike profiles, job templates are specific to a single c
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 227/1241
For example, a job template containing
parameters for a weekly batch assignment job
This job template is
specific to the Assignment
Manager component
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 228/1241
Module Highlights
Component Groups are logical groupings of server co
Enable component groups on the enterprise, assign tserver, and enable them on that server
Set individual components to automatic or manual sta
Set component parameters at one of five levels: Ente
Server, Component Definition, Server Component, or
Parameter values are inherited from higher levels
Use Delete Parameter Override to restore inheritance
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 229/1241
Profiles are sets of parameters used by multiple comp
Also known as “named subsystems”
Job templates are sets of parameters used to execute
components
Lab
In the lab you will:
Use the Enterprise Explorer to examine component grocomponents, and parameters
Examine parameter inheritance
Enable a component group on a server
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 230/1241
1
Module 10: Server Management
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 231/1241
1
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Monitor the state of the enterprise, and individual servecomponents within that enterprise
Perform routine administrative tasks on the enterprise,
Managing components
Backing up and restoring the enterprise
Setting logging options Submitting jobs
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 232/1241
Why you need to know:
These administrative tasks must frequently be perform
configuring and testing a deployment
Server Administration
Once components have been enabled and their param
have been defined, perform common administration ta Monitor the system
Change component parameters or component states, p
without shutting down the server
Back up the system after making these changes
Submit batch jobs for processing Perform these tasks using the Administration – Serve
Management screen
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 233/1241
Management screen
A command-line interface is also available
Useful for using scripts to interact with the enterprise
Server Groups
Add servers to a Server Group using the command-lin
change attribute groupname=<group name> for <server name>
Connect to all servers in the group simultaneously:srvrmgr /g <gateway> /e enterprise /z <group
/u <user> /p <password>
Performing groupwide manipulations such as changinparameters:change parameter NotifyHandler=newHandler
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 234/1241
Changes the parameter for all servers in the server gro
Adding a server to aserver group allows you
to manipulate all
servers in that group
simultaneously from the
command line interface
Monitor the Enterprise
Monitor the enterprise from the Administration – Serv
Management screen Provides status icons for servers, components, jobs, ta
sessions, and the enterprise
Ad i i t ti S
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 235/1241
Administration – Server
Management > Enterprises
shows the states of servers
and their components
within the enterprise
Monitor Sessions
Use the Session Monitor to monitor users logged in a
current activity Sessions are tasks running the associated Object Man
Navigate to Administration – Server Management > S
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 236/1241
MWEST is currently logged in to
Call Center (SCCObjMgr_enu) and
is looking at the Account List Applet
Manage Component States
Manage components across the entire enterprise from
Administration – Server Management > Components Manage components on a particular server from the
Administration – Server Management > Servers scree
In either case, components may be paused, resumed
up, or shut down
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 237/1241
Current
state in th
Component States
Running: The component is available and at least one
component task is currently running Online: The component is available but no componen
currently running
Unavailable: The component is unavailable and no co
tasks are running
Paused: The component is online but is not accepting Shutting Down: The server is shutting down; currently
tasks will execute to completion but no new tasks can
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 238/1241
tasks will execute to completion, but no new tasks can
Shutdown: The server component is shut down
Change Component Parameters
Change component parameters by changing the Valu
on Restart Examine the Effective setting to see when the parame
change will become effective
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 239/1241
Effective setting
indicates when
parameter change
will become effective
Reconfigure Component Definitions
Modifies component parameters without shutting dow
server(s) Useful during site migrations or application updates
Useful when changing multiple parameters and change
be performed at once
For example, when changing both a user name and a pas
parameter, changing one at a time would lead to authenti
During reconfiguration:
Tasks started before and during reconfiguration continu
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 240/1241
with the old parameters
Tasks started after the reconfiguration is committed run
new parameters
Reconfigure Component Definitions
From the Administration –
Server Configuration >Enterprises screen
Start Reconfiguration:
Opens existing component
parameters for modification
Commit Reconfiguration: Commits the updated
Component Definition
Reconfigure Component Definitions Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 241/1241
p
All tasks started after the
commit run with the new
parameters
Cancel Reconfiguration:
Cancels the current
reconfiguration; component
definition remains unaltered
Back Up the Enterprise
Recommended practice: Back up the enterprise a
making any configuration changes such as modifcomponent parameters
Creates a backup copy of siebns.dat
siebns.dat stores information about components, pa
and servers
May also be used for backup or migration purpose Do not try to manually duplicate this file
File is in se as long as Siebel Gate a Name Ser
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 242/1241
File is in use as long as Siebel Gateway Name Serv
running
Restore the Enterprise
Restore a previous enterprise configuration with t
steps:1. Shut down the Siebel Gateway Name Server and
Server
2. Replace the existing siebns.dat file with a working
3. Start the Siebel Gateway Name Server and the S
Server
1. For Windows, right-click
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 243/1241
2. Restore a backup o
to <siebeldir>\gtwysr
each service and select Stop
3. Right-click each
service and select Start
Server Event Logging
Monitor server events by setting their log levels
Navigate to Administration - Server Configuration > SServer Event Configuration
Set the log level for each Siebel Server event of interes
Select the Siebel Server for which
you want to log events
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 244/1241
Select the event type you want to
log and enter a logging level from 0 to 5 in the Log L
Log Levels
There are six available logging levels for server event
0: Fatal 1: Errors
2: Warnings
3: Informational
4: Details
5: Diagnostic Higher log levels generate larger log files and may aff
performance, hence the recommended practice is to o
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 245/1241
performance, hence the recommended practice is to o
these levels when troubleshooting
Component Event Logging
Use the Component Event Configuration view to set t
level of component event types
Select thecomponent for
which you want to
log events
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 246/1241
Select the event
type you want tolog and enter a
logging level in the
Log Level field
log events
Examine Logs
Each task creates a log of its execution
Drill down on the
task number …
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 247/1241
… to view the TaskInformation Log
Examine Log Files
View the log file on the Siebel Server View the log file on the Siebel Server
1. Note the
task number
2. Locate
the <Siebe
dir
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 248/1241
3. Examine the file
System alerts collect information about the failure of t
unavailability of components, and send email alerts toadministrators
Examples:
A component fails to restart
Critical system throughput thresholds are achieved
Create additional alerts to notify additional individualshandle different types of alerts
System Alerts
1. Select System Alerts
i E t i E l
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 249/1241
2. Define new system alerts and ale
parameters to notify additional individ
or to handle different types of alerts
in Enterprise Explorer
Using System Alerts
To configure a component to use these system alerts
Navigate to Administration – Server Configuration > SeComponents
Select the component of interest
Specify the notification handler for that component
One of the system alert profiles previously created
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 250/1241
Notification
handler is a
parameter for
every component
that specifies
which system
alert to use
Submit Batch Jobs
Navigate to Administration – Server Management > J
Create a new job or copy an existing job Job templates as well as components are listed for new
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 251/1241
Both job templates an
batch components ar
listed in the pick apple
Submit Batch Jobs Continued
Specify job parameters
Optionally, schedule the job to repeat at regular intervrun on a preferred server if it is available
Submit the job
Jobs can be set to rep
periodically or to hav
preferred server on whic
Submit the job once all
options have been set
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 252/1241
Specific parameters
depend on the job youare submittingCreate and define
job parameters
Manage Batch Jobs
Cancel, pause (hold), or resume jobs from the Admin
Server Management > Jobs screen
Monitor the progress of the job from the AdministratioManagement > Tasks screen
Canc
res
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 253/1241
Batch job appears a
a task in the tasks lis
Module Highlights
Monitor the state of the enterprise, servers, compone
jobs, and sessions from the Administration - ServerManagement screen
Change component parameters
May require reconfiguring component definitions
Back up the enterprise after changing configurations
Set logging options and system alerts to monitor the s Submit and monitor batch jobs
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 254/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 255/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 256/1241
1
Module 11: Siebel Client Types
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 257/1241
1
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 258/1241
Business Challenge
Not all Siebel application users have access to the W
times Some users spend a great deal of time traveling
Sales representatives
Executives
Instructors
Other users may want to access the application using
mobile phones or Personal Digital Assistants (PDAs)
Developers may need to access Siebel data when a S
Server or even the entire enterprise is down
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 259/1241
Server or even the entire enterprise is down
Business Solution
Oracle provides five client types for use with the Sieb
application: Siebel Web Client
Siebel Wireless Web Client
Siebel Mobile Web Client
Siebel Handheld Client
Siebel Developer Web Client
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 260/1241
Siebel Web Client Scenario
Wayne is an employee working from home, and connect
company’s network. He would like to frequently and quicand update the activities of his assigned accounts. Since
computer has a browser, but no Siebel software, he type
appropriate URL to access the account data.
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 261/1241
Wayne is using the Siebel Web Client
Siebel Web Client
Is a “near zero footprint” client
Uses only a Web browser and a network connection For High Interactivity (HI) clients, includes ActiveX cont
truly zero-footprint in HI mode
Accesses Siebel Servers through the Web Server run
Siebel Web Server Extension (SWSE)
Accesses Siebel data through an Application Object M(OM)
Siebel Web Client Web Server
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 262/1241
Siebel G
Name Enterprise
Siebel File
System Siebel Server
SWSEBrowser
Object Manager Object Manager CFG SR
Component
Database
Server
Siebel Wireless Web Client Scenario
Wendy is a salesperson. She has a meeting set up with
opportunities. Since she is running late, Wendy uses herenabled phone to retrieve the meeting information from t
database. As an outcome of the meeting, she updates th
stage of the opportunity.
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 263/1241
Wendy is using the Wireless Web Client
Siebel Wireless Web Client
Allows users to read from, write to, and search the Sie
database through a wireless connection between a mdevice and the Siebel Web Server
Requires a wireless gateway to translate HTTP data ge
Siebel Wireless to Wireless Application Protocol (WAP
Uses the same logical data model as the Siebel Web
Same business objects, business components, and so
Uses wireless-specific applets, screens, and views
Determined by the Wireless Object Manager
Si b l Wi l W b W b SWi l
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 264/1241
Siebel Wireless Web
Client
Web Server
Sieb
NaEnterprise
Siebel File
System Siebel Server
SWSE
Wireless Object Manager Wireless Object Manager CFG SR
Compo
Database
Server
Wireless
Gateway
Siebel Mobile Web Client Scenario
Mary is a consultant. She is at the airport waiting for her
would like to access contact information for an active opSince she cannot access the server, she is retrieving this
information from a local database on her laptop.
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 265/1241
Mary is using the Mobile Web Client
Siebel Mobile Web Client
Is designed to provide full Siebel application functiona
requiring a network connection A local executable providing full application functionalit
installed on the client
This local executable accesses local .cfg and .srf files,
its data in a local database and Siebel File System
Directly connects to a designated Siebel Server for
synchronization of data and files
Enterprise
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 266/1241
Siebel Server
Synchronization Manager
Siebel File
System
Database
Server
Mobile Client
Object Manager Object Manager
C
Siebel Mobile Web Client Caveats
Many users mistake the Mobile Web Client for the We
Application functionality is almost the same, so users fois which
To determine which application is running, check the
The Mobile and Developer Web Clients have a port nu
URL, and no application name
The Web Client usually does not have a port number in
and includes the application name
Mobile Web Client URL has a port
number and no application name
Web Client URL has no por
and includes the applicatio
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 267/1241
Siebel Handheld Client
Architecture is similar to the Siebel Mobile Web Client
The handheld client includes local database, file systemconfiguration files
The handheld client synchronizes with a specific Siebe
Architecture is not identical to Siebel Mobile Web Clie
Only runs on Windows-based mobile devices
Supports a focused subset of application functionality
Screens, views, and applets customized for Siebel Handh
Applications customized for Siebel Handheld
Enterprise
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 268/1241
Siebel Server
Synchronization Manager
Handheld Client
Object Manager Object Manager C
Siebel Developer Web Client Scenario
Dana is a system administrator. She has the client softw
installed locally because she requires access to the app
even when the servers are not available.
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 269/1241
Dana is using the Siebel Developer Web Clien
Siebel Developer Web Client
Is used by developers and system administrators for d
access to the Siebel database
Siebel servers do not have to be running
Does not require a Web server
Is similar to the Siebel Mobile Web client in that:
A local application must be installed on the client
Local configuration files must be stored on the client
However, can access any Siebel database and file sy
including a local one or the enterprise’sEnterprise
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 270/1241
Siebel File
System
Database
Server
Siebel Server
Server Components
Dedicated Web Client
Object Manager Object Manager
The Big Picture
The Siebel application supports a mixture of clients, d
on your users’ business requirements
Mobile/HDedicated Web Client
Siebel Wireless Web
ClientSiebel W
Bro
Wireless
Gateway
Web Server
SWSE
Enterprise
Siebel Server
Server Components
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 271/1241
ObjeObjeObject Manager Object Manager Object Manager Object Manager
Component Parameters
Server Components
Siebel File
System
Database
Server
CFG
SRF
CFG SRF
Module Highlights
The Siebel Web Client accesses the Siebel Enterprise
Siebel Servers through a Web server running SWSE
The Siebel Wireless Web Client connects to a WAP-en
Web server, and is otherwise similar to the Siebel Web
The Siebel Mobile Web Client is a local executable tha
to a local database and provides full Siebel application
functionality
The Siebel Handheld Client is similar to the Siebel Mo
client, but runs on handheld devices
The Siebel Developer Web Client is used by develope
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 272/1241
p y p
system administrators for direct access to the Siebel d
and for development and administrative changes
In-Class Discussion
Which client is best suited for:
Disconnected remote users needing access to their da
A user with a cell phone needing access to his or her d
Users needing frequent and fast access to their data (e
scalable and maintained)
Server administrator needing access (to shut down a s
component)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 273/1241
Lab
In the lab you will:
Answer questions about client types Use the Developer and Mobile Web Clients
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 274/1241
1
Module 12: Securing Access to the
Application
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 275/1241
1
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe the types of user authentication supported by
applications
Explain the role of the security adapter
Describe Single Sign On (SSO) security and how it diff
other authentication methods
Why you need to know:
You must understand the security mechanisms in orde
to implement them
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 276/1241
Siebel Application Security
Siebel applications are secured at several levels:
Data visibility and view access should be restricted so
only the appropriate views and data
Subject of previous module
Access to the application should be restricted to author
Subject of this module
Communication between architecture components may
secured Subject of subsequent module
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 277/1241
Authentication
Is the process of validating a user’s identity
Verifies the identity of users before they gain access tapplication
Typically consists of collecting a set of user credentia
user ID and password and comparing them to pre-sto
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 278/1241
Supported Authentication Methods
Siebel applications support authentication by either th
servers or the Web server:
Siebel security adapters are software programs that all
servers to authenticate users
Single Sign On (SSO) allows the Web server to authen
Siebel Web Server Extension performs authentication che
Security adapter is still involved in verifying the “trust toke
it by the Web server
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 279/1241
Siebel Security Adapters
A security adapter is a piece of software that connects
authentication service
Implemented as part of the Application Object Manage
SWSE
Web
Server
Browser
1. User
provides
credentials
in browser
2. Credentials are passed
through Web server to
AOM. Web server does
not check the credentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 280/1241
Credentials
Siebel Object
Manager
Security
Adapter Authentication
Service
3. Security adapter authenticates
credentials using authentication ser
Authentication Services
Siebel applications support multiple authentication se
Database authentication
Lightweight Database Authentication Protocol (LDAP)
Active Directory Services Interface (ADSI)
Custom authentication using the Siebel Security Adapt
Developer’s Kit (SSASDK)
Creating custom security adapters is beyond the scope o
Refer to the Siebel Security Adapter SDK in Bookshelf
Siebel Object Security Authenticatio
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 281/1241
Siebel Object
Manager
Security
Adapter Authenticatio
Service
Credentials
Database Authentication
Users are authenticated against the
underlying database
The database Security Adapter is the
default for Siebel applications
Siebel Object Manager
SWSE
Web
Server
Browser
2. Password may be hashed to
prevent direct database accessHash passwo
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 282/1241
Siebel
Database
Connect using DB3. Connect to database using user ID
and (possibly hashed) password.RDBMS performs authentication
Database Authentication Considerations
Does not require additional infrastructure components
directory servers
Uses a separate database login for each user
Requires ongoing support from a database administrat
May support account policies based on those of the R
Password expiration
Password syntax
Account lockout
Supports minimal user self-management
User cannot perform self-management without being g
di t t th d t b
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 283/1241
direct access to the database server
Directory Server Authentication
Users are authenticated
external directory service
The directory service con
user’s credentials and ad
information
A single reserved databa
typically used for all userCredentials
Siebel Object
Manager
SWSE
Web
Server
Browser
Security
Adapter
AuLogin
Retrieve
1. User
provides
information
2. Verify
credentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 284/1241
Connect using DB account
reserved DB
Account
3. Connect
to databaseSiebel
Database
Directory Service Considerations
Reduces administrative overhead
Eliminates maintenance of a separate database login f
Allows Web users to self-register and maintain login inf
Allows automated creation of users from User Adminis
Allows external delegated administration of users
Allows credentials store to be shared across multiple
applications
May support account policies based on those of the d
service
Password expiration
Password syntax
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 285/1241
Password syntax
Account lockout
Single Sign On
Web Server provides crthird-party service
Security Adapter looks uretrieves Siebel user IDaccount based on identiexternal source
Authenticated User IDand Trust Token
Siebel Object
Manager
SWSE
Web Server
Browser
Security
Adapter
ALogin
2. Verifie
credentia
User Credentials
1. User
providesinformation
3. Passes
authenticateduser ID and
trust token
Retrieves
Siebel user ID
4. Verifies
trust token
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 286/1241
Connect Using DB Account
5. Connects
to databaseSiebel
Database
Siebel user ID
and DB
account
trust token
and collects
user ID
Single Sign On Considerations
Allows users to access multiple applications without a
login
For example, Windows Integrated Authentication allow
access Siebel applications directly once they have logg
their Windows accounts
Uses credentials that are collected and verified by the
server
Management of authentication can be performed from centralized location
Requires the use of a trust token
Secret value shared by the Web server and Object Ma
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 287/1241
Allows Siebel applications to be deployed into existing
sites and portals
Single Sign On Considerations Continued
Some Siebel User Administration features that are no
using SSO should be disabled for consistency, for exa
User self-registration
Delegated administration of users
Change password
Requires synchronization of users between the Siebe
application and the external authentication system
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 288/1241
Comparing Authentication Methods
YesYesNo Allows using same
credentials across
NoYesNo Allows creation of
users from within the
Siebel application
NoYesNoSupports user self-
management
Depe
direc
Depends on
directory service
Depends on
RDBMS
Supports account
policies such as
password expiration
YesYesNoRequires additionalinfrastructure
SingleDirectory Service
Authentication
Database
Authentication
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 289/1241
YesYesNo Allows external
management of
users
YesNoNo Allows single sign-on
multiple applications
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 290/1241
Lab
In the lab you will:
Create a database account for a new user
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 291/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 292/1241
1
Module 13: Installing Siebel
Applications
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 293/1241
1
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe pre-installation steps necessary to prepare yo
environment for a Siebel installation
Install the Siebel application
Perform post-installation steps to verify your Siebel env
Describe how to use the multi-server update tool to aut
installations
Why you need to know:
Successful configuration of the Siebel environment req
successful installation
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 294/1241
Business Challenge: Enterprise Installation
Installing enterprise-level software requires careful pla
preparation
Hardware and software prerequisites must be met
Multiple installers must be run in the correct sequence
Configuration parameters must be properly set before,
after installation
Installation may be required on many machines
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 295/1241
Business Solution: Siebel Installation Tools
Siebel provides several tools to assist with the installa
Siebel environments:
Bookshelf documentation:
Deployment Planning Guide and System Requirements a
Platforms guide to prepare the system
Installation Guide [Windows or UNIX] to perform the insta
Step-by-step installers
Guide you through the installation process itself Environment Verification Tool (EVT)
Performs verification tests on system at any time during t
to check:
Prerequisites
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 296/1241
Configuration settings
Installations
Siebel Multi-Server Update Tool
Upgrades multiple server instances from a central admini
Performing a Successful Installation
Has three separate phases:
Pre-installation
Installation
Verification
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 297/1241
Pre-Installation Tasks
Plan the System Topology
Verify System Requirements
Create Prerequisite Objects
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 298/1241
Plan the System Topology
Identify where software will be installed
Which machine(s)
Consider hardware and networking requirements
What naming convention
What directory structure
Use the Deployment Planning Guide as an aid
Example:
Web Client
Enterprise Server
C1
Siebel G
E1
Siebel Server(s)
S1 S2
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 299/1241
C1, GS, S1, D1, W1Machine/Host Names/Addresses:
D1
C1
W1
Web Server
Database
Server
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 300/1241
Verify System Requirements Continued
Optionally, run the Environment Verification Tool (EVT
prerequisites
Command-line tool for checking environment
Installed as part of the Siebel Server installation, so it m
copied from another installation to be run prior to serve
Run EVT with no flags to check
the pre-installation environment
Checks system software, net
settings, and recommended
tools, but does not verify RD
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 301/1241
Create Prerequisite Objects
Create the Siebel database
Install the proper version of your chosen supported RD
software
Create an empty database/tablespace with appropriate
defined
Consult the platform-appropriate Siebel Installation Gu
recommended database configuration parameter settin
Create the Siebel file system Create the Siebel file system as a directory on a disk w
space
Alternatively, partition the file system across multiple dire
servers
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 302/1241
Must be accessible from machines running Siebel Serv
Must support long and case-sensitive file names
Create Prerequisite Objects Continued
Create a Siebel service owner account
Used to run Enterprise processes and components
Siebel Gateway Name service
Siebel Server service
Name must be consistent across all servers:
Siebel Gateway Name Server
Siebel Servers
Server on which Siebel File System resides Recommended practice: On Windows use a domain ac
rather than separate accounts on each machine
Consult the platform-appropriate Siebel Installation G
exact steps and privileges
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 303/1241
p p g
Installation Tasks
Create the Installation Image
Install the Enterprise
Configure the Server(s)
Install the Database
Install the Siebel Web Server Extensions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 304/1241
Install Additional Applications
Create the Installation Image
Run the Siebel Image Creator utility provided on your
generate an installation image
Refer to the Siebel Installation Guide for detailed steps
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 305/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 306/1241
Run Siebel Enterprise Configuration Tool
Once installation completes, the enterprise configurat
runs automatically to set system parameters
Alternatively, run <InstallDir>/gtwysrvr/bin/ssincfgw.exeat a later time
Create Gateway Name Server, Enterprise, and Siebe
Server Extension logical profile
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 307/1241
Key Enterprise Configuration Parameters
To configure a new Gateway Name Server requires:
Gateway Name Server port, language for server messa
logs, and service account
To configure a new Enterprise requires:
An existing Siebel Gateway Name Server
An Enterprise name, Siebel file system, database platfo
login information, and security type (database/LDAP/A
To configure a new Siebel Web Server Extension logirequires:
An existing Siebel Gateway Name Server and Enterpri
A directory in which to store the profile, network configu
parameters such as HTTP and HTTPS ports, High Inte
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 308/1241
p p , g
Standard Interactivity default login names, and an Ente
security token
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 309/1241
Key Server Configuration Parameters
Configuring a new Siebel Server requires:
An existing Gateway Name Server and Enterprise
The Siebel Server name
Which component groups to enable on that server
The language for server messages
The languages to deploy
Various port settings, including:
The connection broker port, used by the Siebel Web ServExtensions and other server components for communicat
The Siebel Remote Synchronization Manager port
The database connection port
Server clustering information
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 310/1241
Install the Database
Run grantusr.sql in the dbsrvr/<RDBMS> directory on
database created during pre-installation
Manually run the database configuration utility and insdatabase
Creates appropriate schema and populates database w
data
Optionally, enter license key during database initializat
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 311/1241
Install the Siebel Web Server Extensions
Use the SWSE installer to install the Siebel Web Serv
Extension on the machine hosting the Web server
The Siebel Enterprise Server must already have been generate the Enterprise-specific SWSE profile
Specify parameters, including load-balancing strategy f
server installations and connection broker port
Specify load b
for multiple s
Siebel native
balancing (su
by the SWSE)
party load ba
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 312/1241
party load ba
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 313/1241
Verification Tasks
Check Installation Logs
Verify Services
Run EVT
Log In to Applications
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 314/1241
Check Installation Logs
Every step of configuration generates a log file:
Siebel Gateway Name Server configuration log is
/gtwysrvr/log/sw_cfg_util.log Siebel Server configuration log is /siebsrvr/log/sw_cfg_
Siebel Web Server Extention configuration log is
/SWEApp/log/sw_cfg_util.log
Check these logs for severe or fatal errors
Informational messages are listed asGenericErrors with a severity level of 1
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 315/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 316/1241
Run EVT
Use the Environment Verification Tool to check the st
your enterprise
Tool reads evt.ini file to determine what checks to perfo Tool supports checking Siebel Gateway Name Server,
Server, Siebel Web Server Extension, third-party Web
third-party database
Output can be text, text file, HTML, or HTML file
For complete details on using the EVT, see your platfoInstallation Guide
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 317/1241
EVT Example
The following example runs the EVT with the default o
outputs the results to output.htmlThe –o flag specifies
the output file format
The o
coded
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 318/1241
Log In to Applications
Log in to the Siebel application to confirm connectivity
Web server and Siebel server
Web server address Application SWE command appended to
the URL by the application’s
default Web page
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 319/1241
Browser Health Check
Is a utility that runs on the browser to verify that it is pconfigured for High Interactivity
Runs when the Web client is invoked if it is enabled in section of siebel.cfg
Checks the client environment on which the Siebel aprunning
Internet options
Java setting
Environment/registry settings Performs checks using
values set in the applicationconfiguration file
Each check can haveone of the following values
Set values in
[clientHealthC
section of tconfiguration
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 320/1241
one of the following values
Required
Recommended
Ignore
Multi-Server Updates
The Siebel Update Server provides a single administr
for patching and updating multiple Siebel servers
Allows quick monitoring of each server’s current patch Supports both push and pull models of software upda
Administrator can send updates out to all servers (push
Servers can periodically query the update server for up
Siebel Update Server
provides a centralized
administration point for
managing updates on
Siebel servers
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 321/1241
Siebel servers
Siebel Update Server
Is a Web-based installation tool based on Macrovision
Installshield
Uses a Tomcat/JSP Web server on the Update Server Includes a local database on the Update Server for sto
product information across an enterprise
Currently supports server updates and patches
Gateway Name Server, Siebel Enterprise, Siebel Serve
Web Server Extension, and so forth
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 322/1241
Siebel Update Server Architecture
A single update server provides a central access poin
multiple clients
Siebel Update Server software is installed on server Siebel Update Client software is installed on each clien
Clients have other Siebel software installed, such as Sieb
Siebel Web Server Extension
Siebel Update Server
Clients are Siebel
Servers or Siebel
Web Servers
in
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 323/1241
Siebel Update Server
Siebel Update Clients
W
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 324/1241
Siebel Update Server Functionality Continued
Administrator may select client machines and schedu
for them (push method)
Clients may check for updates and download them whconvenient (pull method)
Administrator may
choose which clients
to updateClient may
manually check
for updates (pull)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 325/1241
Administrator may
push updates to
clients
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 326/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 327/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe the major types of object definitions
Describe the relationships between them
Why you need to know:
Enables you to explore an existing application effective
Provides the foundation you need to configure the obje
definitions that form the basis of an application
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 328/1241
The Siebel Application Architecture
Recall that the Siebel Application consists of:
An execution engine that provides the application beha
The Siebel Server(s); more specifically, their components Configuration files and the Siebel Gateway Name Serv
specify operating parameters for the execution engine
Most configuration parameters are stored in the Gateway
A relational database that stores user data
A set of physical User Interface (UI) files that specify ho
the UI in the user’s
A Siebel Repository File (SRF) containing compiled ob
definitions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 329/1241
The Siebel Application Architecture Continued
Object definitions are created, modified, and stored in
tables in the database and compiled to the SRF
.cfg
UI files
Siebel Application
Specifies
parameters to
Generates
Supplies compiledobject definitions to
User Interface
Serves
data to
Shape the UI viaObject
Manager
No object
definitions here
• Siebel template files
• Cascading style sheets
• Image files
Object definitions
compiled to here
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 330/1241
Database
Server
.cfg
Configuration
File
Objectdefinitions
stored here
UI laye
definitio
Busines
definiOpportunity
Account
Product Contact
Account
Siebel Repository File (SRF)
Contains compiled object definitions that specify:
Presentation of data
Business logic Physical table storage
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 331/1241
Data la
definitio
Object Definitions
Provide the foundation for application execution
Are grouped in three layers with different purposes
Refer to definitions in the next lower layer
Screen
BusinessComponent
BusinessObject
ViewApplet
Field
List Column
or Control
UI
Layer
Business
Layer 1
Re
Siebel Application Architecture
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 332/1241
TableColumnDataLayer
Data Layer
Data layer object definitions specify the logical structu
physical database
Definitions are metadata, not data In the Data layer, there are two principal data object d
Table definitions
Column definitions
ORDER_NUM
S_ORDER
DISCNT_PERCENT STATUS
Columns
Table
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 333/1241
Business Layer
Business object definitions specify the business logic
application
In the Business layer, there are two principal objects: Business component
Business object
Business
object
Business
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 334/1241
component
Business Component (BC)
Represents one fundamental business entity in the en
For example: Service Request, Contact, Activity
Represents a logical grouping of data from one or mo Refers to a base table
Consists of multiple fields that characterize the busine
component
Many fields within the business component reference c
the base table
Order Number Discount Stat
Order Entry - OrdersBusiness
component
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 335/1241
ORDER_NUM
S_ORDER
DISCNT_PERCENT STATUS
Basetable
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 336/1241
Business Object (BO)
Is a collection of related Business components (BCs)
Represents a major functional area of the enterprise
For example, order management Contains specific details about the relationships betw
One BC is the master or driving BC
Organizes related business components
Action
Order Entry
- Orders
Quote Payments
Order Entry
Business
Object
(BO)
Business
Parent BC pr
focus for
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 337/1241
yComponent
(BC)
Comparing Business Components and Business
Business Objects provide focus to views and organize
Business Components provide data to applets and co
manipulation in tables
Business
Component
Business
Object
Applet
Field
Control data
Business Component Business Ob
Business
Component
Provide data Provide focus
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 338/1241
Table
manipulation Details
relationships
between BCs
UI Object Definitions
There are five principal UI objects within the user inte
3. View
1.
Application
2. Screen
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 339/1241
Control and List Column Object Definitions
Provide the ability to display and manipulate data
T
disp
c
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 340/1241
Applet Object Definition
A section of a view, such as a list or form
References one business component whose data can
viewed and edited through the list or form Consists of list column or textbox control object defini
Refer to fields in the applet-referenced business compo
Specify how the data for the fields is displayed in the lis
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 341/1241
Order Number Account Oppo
Business
component
Order Entry - Orders
View Object Definition
Specifies a view in a Siebel application
Contains multiple applet object definitions
Order Entry
- Orders
Action Quote Payments
Order Entry
View references
one BO
Applet references
one BCBO
Order Entry – My Orders View (Sa
Vie
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 342/1241
BC
Screen Object Definition
Specifies a screen in a Siebel application
Is associated with a major functional area of the enterp
Contains multiple view object definitions that usually rsame business object
Administration screens are an exception
Screens
Same screenViews in
that screen
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 343/1241
Application Object Definition
Specifies a particular collection of screens available in
application
Application
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 344/1241
Configuring Siebel Applications
Is accomplished by using:
An HTML editor to modify template and other physical
Siebel Tools to modify object definitions
Physical UI Files
UI Object Definitions
Business Object Definitions
D t Obj t D fi iti
Configurable Layers
Use an HT
modify
Use Siebel
object
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 345/1241
Data Object Definitions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 346/1241
Lab
In the lab you will:
Examine how UI layer object definitions reference busi
object definitions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 347/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 348/1241
1
Module 15: Using Siebel Tools to
Examine Object Definitions
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 349/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe the differences between object types and obje
Use Siebel Tools to examine parent and child object de
Why you need to know:
Enables you to configure Siebel applications effectively
Enables you to examine mappings that support bulk da
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 350/1241
Siebel Tools
Is an Integrated Development Environment (IDE)
Is a declarative configuration tool
Is used to create and modify object definitions (metadadefine Siebel applications
Set properties for objects that control behavior
No need to modify source code or write SQL
Configure
objects instead
of writing code
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 351/1241
Object Definitions
Are metadata that define elements of the user int
business logic, and data storage
Are stored in the Siebel Repository, a subset of tathe Siebel database
Are examined, created, and edited using Siebel T
Are compiled into the repository file for a configur
application
Object
Manager
Configured
application
Tools output is inpu
for object manage
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 352/1241
Repository
DataRep
Object Definition
Consists of a set of properties with assigned values
Is created from a template called an object type
View
Name:
Title:
Inactive:
View
Name: Account List View
Title: My Accounts
Inactive: FALSE
Template
with empty
properties
Object with
values in
properties
Object Type Object Definition
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 353/1241
properties properties
Examining Object Definitions
Use the Object List Editor (OBLE) to display object de
Select an object type in the Object Explorer (OE)
Object definitions appear in the Object List Editor
OEObject
property
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 354/1241
Siebel Tools User Interface
Differs from the client application
Has toolbar icons for common user operations
Record navigation Query Sort
Menu invoked by
right-clicking
object definition
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 355/1241
Properties Window
Displays the properties for the object definition selecte
OBLE
Select View > Windows > Properties Window
Properties are listed in alphabetical order
The value is shown next to property name
Propertieswindow
Does not show Changed
Same value
OBLE
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 356/1241
Does not show Changed
or Project properties
Hierarchy of Object Types
Some object types contain child object types
For instance, Field is a child object type of the Busines
Component object type
Multiple
hierarchy
levels
Object
explorer
displays
hierarchy
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 357/1241
Object Explorer
Displays by default a small set of the most commonly
object types
Select View > Options and click the Object Explorer tab
remove object types from the Object Explorer
Some options
displayed
All options
displayed
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 358/1241
Viewing Parent/Child Object Definitions
Select object types and definitions alternately to exam
object definitions
2. Select the parendefinition in the O1. Expand the parent objecttype (BC) in the OEUse theTypes tab
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 359/1241
3. Select the desired child
object type (Field) in the OE4. View child object definitions f
parent definition in the lower pa
Additional Navigation Techniques
Back and Forward Buttons
Bookmarks
Hyperlinks
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 360/1241
Hyperlinks
Drill down on a hyperlink to navigate to that object def
For example, applet to business component
For example, business component to table
Underline
in blue
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 361/1241
Back and Forward Buttons
Use the Back button to return to the object definition l
examined
Use the Forward button to return to the current object
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 362/1241
Bookmarks
Use bookmarks to navigate directly to a specific objec
Select desired bookmarkfrom bookmarks window
Add a new
bookmark
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 363/1241
from bookmarks window
Window Navigation
Use dockable windows and tabs for frequently-access
such as the Properties window
Undock windows to resize and place
Autohide docking
windows
m
Window t
Autohide
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 364/1241
Object Explorer: Flat Tab
Removes all hierarchy and shows all object types in a
Helps developers:
Find a child object with an unknown parent
See how object definitions and properties are typically
Parent object definition
displayed (parent applet for the c
Select any
object type
in the OE
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 365/1241
Module Highlights
Siebel Tools is a declarative configuration tool
Object definitions consist of a set of properties with as
values
Are created from a template called an object type
The Object Explorer (OE) lists object types
Object definitions appear in the Object List Editor (OB
Properties Window displays the object definition selec
OBLE Flat tab removes all hierarchy and shows all object ty
single list
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 366/1241
Tools navigation convention used in the labs
Select Business Component :: Account | Field :: Account Role
Lab
In the lab you will:
Use Siebel Tools to examine object definitions in the S
repository
Parent Object
Type in OE
Child Object
Type in OE
Parent Record
in OBLE
Child Record
in OBLE
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 367/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 368/1241
1
Module 16: The Siebel Data Model
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 369/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe the purpose of the Siebel Data Model
Describe the role of primary and foreign keys, indexes,
keys
Identify prominent tables in the Siebel Data Model
Why you need to know:
Enables you to understand how data is accessed in ex
applications
Enables you to understand how to map your business
Siebel Data Model
Enables you to configure the Data layer as necessary f
implementation
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 370/1241
The Siebel Data Model
Defines how the data used by Siebel applications is s
standard third-party relational database
Specifies the tables and relationships
Is designed to support the data requirements across S
applications
Business
Component
B
O
Table
Field
ColumnDefines data storage
organization (makes up
the data model)
Defines business logic
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 371/1241
Siebel Data
Is organized and stored in normalized tables in a relat
database
Each table has multiple columns storing atomic data (s
cannot be logically further sub-divided)
The data schema is organized to eliminate repeated st
data
S_PROD_INTR
OW _I D
N
AME
P ART _N UM
U
OM _ C D
Table
Columns (store
single values only)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 372/1241
Primary Key (PK)
Is a column that uniquely identifies each row in a table
ROW_ID serves as the primary key for Siebel tables
Primary key
S_PROD_INTR OW _I D
NAME
P ART _N
UM
U OM _ C D
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 373/1241
ROW_ID
Is a column in every table
Contains a Siebel application-generated identifier that
across all tables and mobile users
Is managed by Siebel applications and must not be musers
Is viewed by right-clicking the record or
navigating to Help > About Record
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 374/1241
Understanding the Data Model
Columns
User Keys
Indexes
Tables
Relationships Between Tables
Extension Tables
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 375/1241
Tables
Approximately 3,000 tables in the database
Three major types: Data, Interface, and Repository
EIM_PROD_INTR OW _I D
NAME
P ART _N
UM
U OM _ C D
S_TABLER OW _I D
NAME
DE S C _T
E X T
Interface Rep
S_PROD_INTR OW _I D
NAME
P ART _N
UM
U OM _ C D
Data
This module is
focused on data
tables
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 376/1241
Data Tables
Store the user data
Business data
Administrative data
Seed data
Are populated and updated by:
Users through the Siebel applications
Server processes such as: Enterprise Integration Mana
and Assignment Manager
Have names prefixed with S_
Are documented in the Siebel Data Model Reference
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 377/1241
Seven Prominent Data Tables
Store data for the major business entities
S_SRV_REQR OW _I D
S R _N UM
DE S C _T E X T
L A S T _ UP D
A S GN _DT
S_OPTYR OW _I D
NAME
BD GT _AMT
S T G _NAME
P R O G _NAME
S_CONTACR OW _I D
L A S T _NAME
F S T _NAME
S_R OW _I D
S_EVT_ACTR OW _I D
A C T I V I T Y _
UI D
T OD O _ C D
OP T Y _I D
P R O J _I D
S_ORG_EXTR OW _I D
DE S C _T E X
T
DE P T _N UM
E MP _ C O U
NT
DI V I S I ON
S_ASSETR OW _I D
NAME
A S S E T _N U
M
MF G _DT
S E RI AL _N
UM
Opportunity Service Request Conta
Asset Account Activity In
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 378/1241
Columns
Each table has multiple columns to store user and sys
Defined by Column child object definitions
Columns determine the data that can be stored in tha
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 379/1241
Column Properties
Determine size and type of data that can be stored in
Limit proposed modifications to a standard application
Do not edit existing properties
I
t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 380/1241
Data Type and Length Properties
Physical Type identifies the type of data to be stored
Length determines the maximum size
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 381/1241
System Columns
Exist for all tables to store system data
Are maintained by Siebel applications and tasks
System columns
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 382/1241
User Keys
Are used to determine the uniqueness of records whe
entering, importing, or integrating data
Are predefined and cannot be changed
All columns
may not b
Column Combination
provides a unique value
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 383/1241
yp q
Indexes
Are a separate data structure that stores a data value
column and a pointer to the corresponding row
Used to retrieve and sort data rapidly
Are predefined by Siebel as a set of standard indexes
Sequence affects sort order
_
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 384/1241
Sequence affects sort order
Relationships Between Tables
Siebel tables have many predefined relationships to s
as-delivered application
1:M – one-to-many
M:M – many-to-many
S_ASSETR O
W _I D
NAME
A S SET _N UM
S_PROD_LNR O
W _I D
NAME
DE S C _T E X T
1:M relationshipM:M relationship
S_PROD_INTR O
W _I D
NA
ME
P ART _N UM
OR
DE R _ C S T
AsProduct Line
P R OD _ C D
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 385/1241
1:M Relationships
Are captured using foreign key (FK) table columns in
on the many side of the relationship
FK column on many side of the relationship reference
column on one side
PK FK
S_ASSETR OW _I D
NAME
A S S E T _N UM
S E RI AL _N UM
P R OD _I D
Foreign key column for
1:M
Product : Asset
relationship
S_PROD_INTR OW _I D
NAME
P ART _N UM
ORDE R _ C S T
P R OD _ C D
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 386/1241
Foreign Key Table Columns
Are columns in a table that refer to the primary key co
related (parent) table
Many are named with suffix _ID
Are maintained by Siebel applications and tasks to enreferential integrity and should never be updated direc
SQL
Foreign key
Foreign key column
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 387/1241
Finding Foreign Keys for 1:M Relationships
Inspect the Foreign Key Table property in a Column o
definition to determine the column that serves as the
PK FK
S_ASSETR
OW _I D
N
AME
A
S S E T _N UM
S
E RI AL _N UM
P
R OD _I D
S_PROD_INTR
OW _I D
N
AME
P
ART _N UM
O
RDE R _ C S T
P
R OD _ C D
FK
column
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 388/1241
M:M Relationships
Are captured using foreign key columns in a third tabl
the intersection table
S_PROD_LN_PRODR OW _I D
P R OD _L N _I D
P R OD _I D
S_PROD_LNR OW _I D
NAME
DE S C _T E X T
S_PROD_INR OW _I D
NAME
P ART _N UM
Product : Product Line
intersection table
PK
FKFK
PK
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 389/1241
1:1 Extension Table
Is a special table that has a 1:1 relationship with a bas
Foreign key for the relationship:
Is located in the extension table
Is named PAR_ROW_ID
Provides additional columns for business components
referencing the base table
A base and extension table can be considered as a sin
table
S_PROD_INTR OW _I D
NAME
P ART _N UM
U OM _ C D
S_PROD_INT_XR OW _I D
P AR _R OW _I D
AT T RI B _ 3 9
PK FK
Base Table Extension Table
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 390/1241
Standard 1:1 Extension Tables
Prebuilt for many major tables
Have the name of the base table with suffix _X
Contain 40-plus generic columns of varying types
Store data for new business component fields that are to those mapped to the base table
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 391/1241
1:M Extension Table
Is a special table for storing child data related to an ex
parent table
Allows you to track entities that do not exist in the as-
Siebel applications
S_ASSET_XMR OW _
I D
P AR _R OW _I D
T Y P E
NAME
PK FK
S_ASSETR OW _
I D
NAME
A S S E T _N UM
S E RI A
L _N UM
P R OD
_I D
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 392/1241
Standard 1:M Extension Tables
Are prebuilt for many tables
Have the name of the main table appended with _XM
TYPE defines data
classification
PAR_ROW_ID stores FK toROW_ID in main table
NAME stores name of child
entity
ATTRIBs are predefined with
varying types
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 393/1241
Module Highlights
Siebel Data Model defines how data is stored in a thir
relational database
A primary key (PK) is a column that uniquely identifies
table row ROW_ID is a column in every table
Contains a Siebel application-generated unique identifi
User keys specify the columns used to determine uniq
records when entering, importing, or integrating data
Foreign Key Table columns are columns in a table thathe PK column of a related table
1:1, 1:M, and M:M relationships are predefined within
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 394/1241
Lab
In the lab you will:
Examine tables, columns, indexes, and user keys that
Siebel Data Model
Determine the form of relationships between tables in tData Model
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 395/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 396/1241
1
Module 17: Siebel Business
Components
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 397/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Define a business component
Describe how business component fields at the busine
layer are mapped to columns at the data layer Describe how base and joined tables are used as a pa
mapping
Why you need to know:
The business component is a fundamental object in the Application Architecture
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 398/1241
Application Architecture: Business Components
Provide a way to group data according to business lo
Are referenced by applets
Specify access to tables (read, write, and update)
Are used by business objects to provide data to views
TableColumn
Screen
Business
Component
Business
Object
ViewApplet
Field
List Column
or Control
UI
Layer
Business
Layer
DataLayer
Siebel Application Architecture
1
Re
B i C t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 399/1241
Business Component
A business component (BC) is a person, place, th
event about which data must be stored
Represents a fundamental business entity
Provides the foundation for controlling how data i
selected, inserted, and updated in underlying tab
Opportunity
Product Contact
Opportunity
Quote
= Business Component
B i C t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 400/1241
Business Component Continued
Arranges data from one or more tables into a logical g
Consists primarily of fields and joins
Each field references a single column in a table
Is not a table Does not store data
Stores metadata: data about data
Opportunity
Name Sales Stage Sales StageDecision Level
S_OPTYR OW _I D
NAME
DE S C _T E X T
C UR C Y _ C D
S_STGR OW _I D
NAME
P HA S E _ C D
ST G _ ORDER
S_OPTY_XR OW _I D
P AR _R OW _I D
AT T RI B _ 0 1
AT T RI B _ 0 9
AT T RI B _ 3 9
Description
Base Table Joined Tables
BC
B i C t R
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 401/1241
Business Component Reuse
A business component can be:
Defined once in terms of a logical collection of columns
or more tables
Then used in many different business object contexts
Opportunity
Product Contact
Opportunity
Quote
Contact
Product A
Contact
Contact BC appears as
child in Opportunity BO
Contact BC ap
master in Con
Quote
B T bl
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 402/1241
Base Table
Contains the main columns for the business compone
Every business component references only one base
Many BC fields are mapped to base table columns
Fields referencing base tables are editable in the UI
S_OPTYR OW _I D
NAME
DE S C _T E X T
C UR C Y _ C D
Base table
Column:
DESC_TEXT
Field:
Description
Mapping E
Opportunity
Name Sales Stage Sales StDescription Decision Level
Business Component Table Property
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 403/1241
Business Component Table Property
Each business component contains a table property t
specifies the base table
Base
table
Fields That Map to a Base Table
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 404/1241
Fields That Map to a Base Table
Column property maps to a column in the base table
Join property is blank
Join is blank
“Status” field
references base table
Base table
Explicit Join
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 405/1241
Explicit Join
Is a join that brings in data from tables other than the
to meet the business component’s data display requir
Most fields referencing explicitly joined tables are read-
applet Includes a join definition and a join specification
BC field references the join definition
S_OPTYR OW _I D
NAME
DE S C _T E X T
C UR C Y _ C
D
S_STGR OW _I D
NAME
P HA S E _ C
D
S T G _ ORD
E R
Opportunity
Base table Join
Name Sales StageDescription
Fields That Map to a Joined Table
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 406/1241
Fields That Map to a Joined Table
Join property specifies the join object definition being
Column property maps to a column in the joined table
coSales Stage field maps to
Sales Stage join
Name of join that
maps to S_STG table
Joining Data from Joined Tables
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 407/1241
Joining Data from Joined Tables
Returns only one row from the joined table
There is a 1:1 or 1:M relationship from the joined table
Relationship is established using a FK column on the
to join to the PK column on the joined table
S_OPTYR OW _I D
NAME
DE S C _T E X T
C UR C Y _ C D
S_STGR OW _I D
NAME
P HA S E _ C D
S T G _ ORDE R
C URR _ S T G _I D
FK column on base tablePK column o
joined table
Base Table Joined Table
FK PK
Displaying Fields from Joined Tables
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 408/1241
Displaying Fields from Joined Tables
The UI layer specifies how information joined at the b
layer will be displayed
From Base Table From Joined Table
S_STGS_OPTY
Opportunity
BC
Opportunity
List Applet
Data Layer
Business
Layer
UI Layer
Join Definition
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 409/1241
Join Definition
Specifies the joined table from which to retrieve data
Is a child object of the business component
Defaults the alias property to the name of the joined ta
Modify alias when there is more than one join to same
Alias of join
Join Specification
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 410/1241
Join Specification
Specifies how to retrieve the related row from the join
Based on the foreign and primary keys used to relate th
joined tables
S_OPTYR OW _I D
NAME
DE S C _T E X T
C UR C Y _ C D
S_STGR OW _I D
NAME
P HA S E _ C D
S T G _ ORDE R
C URR _ S T G _
I D
Opportunity
Name Sales Stage IdDescription
FK PK
Foreign
Key
field
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 411/1241
Fields That Map to an Extension Table
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 412/1241
Fields That Map to an Extension Table
Join property specifies the extension table being refer
Column property references a column in the extensio
Field is editable in the UI
T
The Budget Amt
field references
the S_OPTY_Xtable
Module Highlights
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 413/1241
Module Highlights
A BC is a person, place, thing, or event about which d
stored
A BC can be defined once then re-used by different B
Each BC references a single base table A BC can include data from joined tables
A join definition specifies joined table
A join specification specifies how to access joined tab
PK/FK
An extension table extends data in the BC
Fields on extension tables use implicit joins
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 414/1241
1
Module 18: Siebel Party Business
Components
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
Module Objectives
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 415/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Define a party business component
Describe the role of S_PARTY and its extension tables
party business component data Describe how data is stored differently for non-party bu
components and party business components
Describe how implicit and explicit joins are used with p
business components
Why you need to know:
Party business components are a fundamental elemen
application architecture
Business Challenge: Modeling Party Data
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 416/1241
Business Challenge: Modeling Party Data
Party data is the ubiquitous information found in most
Some prominent party types include Contacts, Employ
Positions, Accounts, User Lists, Organizations, and Ac
Party types are often related to each other Employees are related to positions
Positions are related to accounts
Access groups are related to organizations
and so forth
Relationships may be dynamic or ad hoc A contractor becomes an intern, then an employee
An access group is required for participants of the Janu
Big Release Roll-Out Event
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 417/1241
Business Solution: Party Business Component
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 418/1241
y p
Provides a way to create a network of relationships be
party types to reflect changes and complexities in the
environment
Infuses flexibility into the data model Can establish and change relationships between variou
types, as needed
Em
Position
Organization
Account
Access Group
Us
Party business
component
Party Business Components
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 419/1241
y p
Are similar to standard business components; they:
Group data according to business logic
Are referenced by applets
Specify access to tables Have fields that map to columns
Name
NAME PARTY_TYPE_CD
Account
S_PARTY
Party Type Code Fields
Columns
Party
business
component
Base table
Differences Between Party and Non-Party BCs
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 420/1241
y y
In standard BCs, most data is stored in the base table
In party BCs, data is stored in extension tables
S_PARTY acts solely as a linking mechanism betwee
S_OPTYR OW
_I D
NAM
E
DE S
C _T E X T
C UR
C Y _ C D
Base Table
Standard BC:
Opportunity
BD G
T _AMT
Party BC: Account
S_PARTYR OW
_I D
NAM
E
Base Table
P AR
T Y _T Y P E _ C D
S_ORG_R OW
_I D
NAM
E
Extensi
_
Standard BCs Party BCs
Relationshipdata stored here
Recostore
Record datastored here
S_PARTY and Its Extension Tables
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 421/1241
_
Eight prominent S_PARTY extension tables store the
S_PARTY
Person
S_EMP_PER
S_USER
S_CONTACT
S_BU
S_ORG_EXT Organi
related
S_POSTN
S_PARTY_GROUP
S_USERLISTAccess
related
Base Table Extension Tables
Commonly Used Party Business Components
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 422/1241
y y p
Represent a variety of entities that can be arranged in
related to persons, organizations, or access control
Contact
Employee
User
Account Position
Division
Organization User List
Access Group
Commonly Used Party Business Components
Person-
Related
Access
Control
Organization-
Related
Person-Related Party Business Components
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 423/1241
y
Store their main data in S_CONTACT
May store additional data in S_USER and S_EMP_PE
Serve as logical extension tables
S_USERR OW _I D
S_CONTACTR OW _I D
L A S T _NAME
F S T _NAME
E MAI L _ADDR
Logical extension
table to store user-
specific data
Stores majority
of person-
related data
S_R OW _I D
Logic
to s
L O GI N
P A S S W ORD
P AR _R OW _I D
PK FK
P AR _R OW _I D
S_PARTYR OW _I D
FK
Person-Related Party Business Components Conti
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 424/1241
Primarily reference person-related S_PARTY extensio
JonesChris3Person3
SmithSally2Person2
DoeJohn1Person1
PAR_ROW_LAST_NAMEFST_NAMEPAR_ROW_IDPARTY_TYPE_CDROW_ID
S_USERS_CONTACTS_PARTY
A person. . . . . .has contact-
related details. . .
.
S_USERS_CONTACTS_PARTY
Party Type Code Last Name Login Name
Party Business Component (BC): User
Person-Related Party Business Components Conti
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 425/1241
A number of person-related business components us
tables
CJONES3JonesChris3
SSMITH2SmithSally2
DoeJohn1
LOGINPAR_ROW_IDLAST_NAMEFST_NAMEPAR_ROW_ID
S_USERS_CONTACT
PAR_ROW
S_EMP
First Name Last Name
Party BC: Contact
Last Name Login Name
Party BC: Employee
John is not a useror employee
Sally iemp
Organization-Related Party Business Componen
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 426/1241
Store their main data in S_ORG_EXT
May store additional data in S_BU
May include account, division, organization, or house
S_BUR OW _I D
S_ORG_EXTR OW _I D
NAME
L O C
E MP _ C O UNT
Logical
table to
organiz
P RT NR _F L G
HI S T _ S L S _V OL
I NT _ OR G _F L G
=‘Y’ for ABC
Company
internal division
PK FK
S_PARTYR OW _I D
PAR _R OW _I D
P AR _R OW _I D
FK
Organization-Related Party Business Componen
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 427/1241
Multiple organization-related business components us
tables
ABC Cust3N ABC Customer3
ABC Company
ABC Company –
Sales Division
NAME
2
1
PAR_ROW_ID
ABC Com2N
HQY
NAMEPAR_ROW_IDLOCINT_ORG_FLAG
S_BU
Name Internal Org Flag Orga
OrganizationName Location
Account
Sales is not an
organization
S_ORG_EXT
Groupings for Access Control
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 428/1241
Represent groupings of party instances
User List
Access Group
Position
R OW _I
D
R OW _I D
R OW _I D
PK FK
S_PARTYR OW _I D
FK
P AR _R
OW _I D
NAME
P AR _R
OW _I D
NAME
S_PARTY_GROUP S_S_USERLIST
Groupings for Access Control Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 429/1241
Position3
Access Group2
Consultants User List1User List1
NAMEPAR_ROW_IDPARTY_TYPE_CDROW_ID
S_USERLISTS_PARTY
2
PAR_ROW_I
S_PARTY
Name
User List
Na
Access Gr
Access Group, User List, and Position are party busincomponents
If a user list,
populateS_USERLIST
If an acce
popS_PARTY
Business
component
Example, Relating Party Data
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 430/1241
A user list can be associated with persons via the S_P
intersection table S_PARTY_PER
There are relationships in S_PARTY
They are represented in S_PARTY_PER
ROW_ID in S_PARTY is used to relate party types
002003
001003
PERSON_IDPARTY_ID
Smith,Person001
Smith,Person002
ABC UsUser List003
NAMPARTY_TYPE_CDROW_ID
S_PARTY_PER S_PARTY
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 431/1241
Party Implicit Joins
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 432/1241
Used to populate the prominent S_PARTY extension
Created automatically for these extension tables
Are similar to implicit joins for standard business com
Do not appear in join object definitions ROW_ID in base table is always the PK
PAR_ROW_ID in extension is always the FK
JonesChris3Person3
SmithSally2Person2
DoeJohn1Person1
PAR_ROW_LAST_NAMEFST_NAMEPAR_ROW_IDPARTY_TYPE_CDROW_ID
S_USERS_CONTACTS_PARTY
FKPK FK
Base Table Extension Table Exte
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 433/1241
Explicit Join Definition
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 434/1241
References the extension table that contains data of i
R OW
_I D
NAM
E
DE S C _T E X T
C UR C Y _ C D
R OW
_I D
NAM
E
L O C
Opportunity
S_PARTY
extension
table
P AR _R OW _I D
S_ORG_EXTP R _D
E P T _ O U _I D
S_OPTY
Name AccountDescription
FK
References
PAR_ROW_ID
Explicit Join: Another Party Business Componen
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 435/1241
Uses an explicit join to the party table, and not the im
Example: Bringing parent account data into the Accoun
component for display in an Account applet
Account
Name Parent Account Name Parent Account LoLocation
Explicit Join Definition
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 436/1241
Select or create an explicit join to the desired S_PART
extension table
Use a join specification to specify the relationship
The Account party
business component…
…has multipleexplicit self-joins
to S_ORG_EXT
Select the one t
the relationshi
Module Highlights
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 437/1241
Party types have dynamic or ad hoc relationships
Party BCs create relationships between party types
Party BCs are similar to standard BCs but data is stor
extension tables Eight prominent S_PARTY extension tables store dat
Person-related party BCs store data in S_CONTACT
Organization-related party BCs store data in S_ORG_
Access Group, User List, and Position are party BCs
Party implicit joins populate S_PARTY extension table Explicit joins reference extension tables that contain d
Lab
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 438/1241
In the lab you will:
Examine how fields in a (non-party) business compone
columns in base and joined tables
Examine how fields in a party business component ma
columns in S_PARTY, its extension tables, and joined
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 439/1241
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 440/1241
1
Module 19: Siebel Business Objects
Module Objectives
Aft l ti thi d l h ld b bl t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 441/1241
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe how business objects focus data presented in
based on context
Describe how views reference business objects
Describe how links are used to relate parent business c
to child business components
Why you need to know:
Business objects enable you to configure your compan
business logic
Application Architecture: Business Objects (BO)
Pro ide a a to organi e BCs into major areas acco
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 442/1241
Provide a way to organize BCs into major areas acco
your business logic requirements
Provide context to views
TableColumn
Screen
Business
Component
Business
Object
ViewApplet
Field
List Column
or Control
UI
Layer
BusinessLayer
Data
Layer
Siebel Application Architecture
1
R
Business Challenge
Business components provide a way to group data ac
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 443/1241
Business components provide a way to group data ac
business logic, but they do not address the need for c
For example, the opportunity BC defines how to retriev
opportunity data, but not related activity data
How is it tha
view shows
related to t
oppo
?
Business Solution: Business Objects Provide Fo
Business objects contain relationships used to access
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 444/1241
Business objects contain relationships used to access
from a child business component
Identifies records to display depending on context in w
are viewed
Ensures that only records related to parent BCs are retqueries
Activities pertai
Kaboom opportun
only Kaboom, are
Business Objects
Are a collection of related business components that
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 445/1241
Are a collection of related business components that
a major area of the business
Contain parent and child business components
Relate parent and child components via links
Links focus records displayed based on the context in w
are viewed
Provide a container for grouping business component
Provide context for views
Action
Opportunity
Product Source
Opportunity
Parent BC provides
most data; data is
specific to the BO
Ch
provid
t
Link focuses data in
view
Business
Object
Business Object Component
Contains Link and BusComp properties that relate the
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 446/1241
Contains Link and BusComp properties that relate the
and child business components to each other
Parent BCChild BC
Link Definition
Identifies the PK/FK relationship
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 447/1241
Identifies the PK/FK relationship
Identifies which records to retrieve from the child busin
component
Identifies the foreign keys to populate when new child r
created
Is used with both 1:M and M:M relationships between
and child data
Action
Opportunity
Product
Opportunity
Link Definition
1:M Link
Used for 1:M relationship
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 448/1241
Used for 1:M relationship
between parent and
child business components
Link DefinitionD
M:M Link
Used for M:M relationship between parent and child b
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 449/1241
Used for M:M relationship between parent and child b
components
Uses an intersection table to resolve the link
Intersectio
with FK c
Cascade Delete Property
The Cascade Delete property of a link specifies wheth
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 450/1241
The Cascade Delete property of a link specifies wheth
records of a 1:M relationship are deleted when the pa
is deleted
None: Neither deletes nor clears the foreign key colum
Clear: Does not delete, but clears the foreign key colum
Delete: If a parent record is deleted, all child records ar
Cascade Delete Property Continued
Determined by your business logic
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 451/1241
Determined by your business logic
Should all activities be deleted if parent contact is delet
Should all child opportunities be deleted if the parent a
deleted?
Deletion
cascades
Grandchild Business Components
Business objects may include grandchild business co
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 452/1241
j y g
Used in parent-child-grandchild views
Activity plans
for Art.net
Activities for
selected Art.net
activity plan
Links for Grandchild Data
Specify how the grandchild and child business compo
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 453/1241
p y g p
related
Used to retrieve grandchild records on parent-child-gra
views
Child/Grandchild
Pare
Module Highlights
Business objects
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 454/1241
j
Provide a way to group BCs according to business logi
Provide context to views
Contain parent and child BCs associated via links
Links provide a way to focus records based on contex
Links relate parent and child BCs
Link definitions specify which records to retrieve from
A 1:M link is used for a 1:M relationship between pare
child BCs
A M:M link is used for a M:M relationship between pa
child BCs
A M:M link uses an intersection table to resolve the link
BOs may include grandchild BCs
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 455/1241
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 456/1241
2
Module 20: Configuration Strategy
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 457/1241
Configuring a Siebel Application Configuring is the process of using Siebel Tools to mo
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 458/1241
as-delivered Siebel application to meet business need
Object definitions are edited and created
Developers do not modify code in siebel.exe
Developers do not write SQL directly
Repository
Data
Object
Manager
Siebel Applications Siebel as-delivered applications include a predefined
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 459/1241
screens, views, lists, forms, and their associated temp
A pred
Tailoring the Logical User Interface Developers tailor the as-delivered Siebel screens, vie
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 460/1241
and forms to better support users’ business needs
A tailor
Tailoring the Physical User Interface Use the existing physical UI files whenever possible
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 461/1241
When necessary, copy existing files and modify as ne
Use an HTML or
a text editor tomodify layout
Database
Server
.cfg
UI files
Configuration File
ObjectManager
•Siebel template files
•Cascading style sheets
•Image files
Use a text editor
to modify colors,
fonts, etc.
Use a graphics
program to add
your
organization’s
images
Siebel Business Entities Siebel as-delivered applications utilize a set of Siebel
t th t i l t th d fi d b i l i
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 462/1241
components that implement the defined business logi
Account
Product
Service Request ActContact
Tailoring the Business Logic
Developers also tailor the application by modifying the
d fi iti f th b i t t i l t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 463/1241
definitions of the business components to implement
business logic appropriate to the users’ organization
Modify form of
the relationship
Add fields
Modify p
of existi
Account
Product
Service Request ActContact
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 464/1241
Configuration Strategy
Make minimal changes to the as-delivered application
U i ti bj t d fi iti i th d li d
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 465/1241
Use existing object definitions in the as-delivered repo
whenever possible
Ensures that a new configuration can be upgraded
with minimal effort
Modify definitions as required, rather than creating ne
Creating new object definitions can lead to redundant c
and increase the maintenance effort
Configuration Strategy Continued
Do not delete, make inactive, or rename seemingly un
object definitions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 466/1241
object definitions
Other object definitions might reference them
Deleting does not save memory, storage space, or imp
performance Use existing template files
Modify only when changes are essential
Modifying a template for one view or applet can have u
consequences if another view or applet uses the same
Configuration Strategy Continued
Plan your configuration project from the top down
First determine UI and application f nctionalit
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 467/1241
First, determine UI and application functionality
Then, determine what changes are necessary at the B
layer to implement UI functionality
Finally, determine what changes are necessary at the Dimplement Business layer changes
Keep changes to a minimum
Determine UI Functionality
Determine Required
Business Layer Changes
Determine Required Data
Layer Changes
Configuration Strategy Continued
Make changes from the bottom up
First edit Data layer definitions if necessary
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 468/1241
First, edit Data layer definitions, if necessary
Then, edit Business layer definitions, as required
Finally, edit or create the templates and UI layer definit
display the data correctly
Edit or Create UI Layer
Templates and Definitions
Edit Business LayerDefinitions, as Required
Edit Data Layer
Definitions, if Necessary
Create a Separate Development Environment
To isolate the development effort from the enterprise’s
production database set up a development environm
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 469/1241
production database, set up a development environm
Each developer or group can work on a different aspe
development effort
Use Siebel-supplied mechanisms to separate the deveeffort into projects
Test all customization and extensions thoroughly befo
deploying to end users
Server Machine DeveloperWorkstation
DeveloperWorkstation
DevelopWorkstat
Develop on the Local Repository
Always make changes to the object definitions in the
repository
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 470/1241
repository
Cannot undo or back out changes when made directly
server
Changes made directly on the server are immediately aother developers
Incomplete changes on the server cause problems
Use Siebel-supplied mechanisms to copy definitions b
server and local databases
Server Machine
Server
repository
Local
repository
Developer
Workstation
Module Highlights
Configuring is the process of using Siebel Tools to mo
as-delivered Siebel application
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 471/1241
as delivered Siebel application
Recommended configuration strategy:
Tailor existing logical UI, physical UI, and business ent
minimize development and support effort Do not delete, make inactive or rename unused object
Use existing template files
Plan configuration project from the top down, make ch
from the bottom up
Development and production environments are separ Enables developer or group to work independently
Enables developer to test customizations before deploy
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 472/1241
2
Module 21: The ConfigurationProcess
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe the development environment architecture
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 473/1241
Describe the development environment architecture
Set up the development environment
Why you need to know: Being able to set up the development environment is c
carrying out a successful configuration
The Development Environment
Siebel Remote is used to establish a local developme
environment
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 474/1241
Siebel Developer Web Client provides full Siebel appl
functionality in a local environment
Accesses a local DB containing a subset of the server Synchronizes with the server database, as necessary
Implements a development and testing environment fo
developers
Siebel Server
Synchronization Manager
Enterprise
Siebel File
System
Developer Web Clien
Object Manager Object Manager
Local
Database
Server
Database
Local
SFS
Server
SRF
Server CFG
Procedure for Setting Up the Development Envir
1. Enable the Development Environment
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 475/1241
2. Create the Developer
3. Create a User Login
4. Generate the Local Database Template
5. Extract User Data
6. Modify and Verify Configuration Settings
7. Initialize Local Database
8. Extract Repository Data
Enable the Development Environment
Enable the Siebel Remote component group to enabl
development using a local database
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 476/1241
p g
After enabling a component group, do not forget to rest
Siebel Server and synchronize components
Enable
Rem
Create the Developer
Add the developer as an employee
Associate a position and responsibility
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 477/1241
Associate a position and responsibility
Register the developer as a mobile client
Add ere
Register mobile
client
Create a User Login
If necessary, create a corresponding database login u
RDBMS tools and the grantusr.sql script as a templat
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 478/1241
Example:
Screen shot from Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio Express copyright © Microsof
Generate the Local Database Template
Run the Generate New Database server task to gene
database template
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 479/1241
Snapshot of the current version of the database schem
columns, indexes, and so forth)
Extract User Data
Run the Database Extract server task to extract user
Generates compressed data files
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 480/1241
Stored on the server
User data is extracted for the user(s) specified in the jo
parameters
Data is extracted to the specifiedmobile user’s directory
Modify Configuration Settings
Modify configuration information for Siebel Tools in
..\tools\BIN\<Language Code>\tools.cfg
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 481/1241
For example, ..\tools\BIN\ENU\tools.cfg
Modify configuration information for Siebel Developer
Client in ..\client\BIN\<Language Code>\<application> For example, ..\client\BIN\ENU\uagent.cfg for the Siebe
Center Developer Web client
Both configuration files hold critical information to ens
behavior of local executables:
Native client connection information for the local databa
ODBC connection for the server
ODBC connection for the local database
Location of the local Siebel file system
Example Configuration Settings
Example: tools.cfg (edited for length)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 482/1241
Overall configuration:
SRF file, application n
directory, and ODBC c
to local and server datatesting connecti
Available data sources. Add more if needed
Local connection in
including native conne
absolute path. Mod
database is in a diffeServer connection
information
Verify Web Client ODBC Connections
Ensure that the Web Client ODBC connection referen
local database
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 483/1241
The database file parameter of SEAW Local Db defaul
must match ConnectString in [Local] section of uagent.
ConnectString must point to local DB: \client\LOCAL\ss
Web Client
connection. . .
. . .must
match
Must poin
Verify Tools ODBC Connections
Ensure that the Tools ODBC connection references th
The database file parameter of SSD Local Db default in
t t h C tSt i i [L l] ti f t l f
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 484/1241
must match ConnectString in [Local] section of tools.cf
Tools
connection
. . .
. . .must
match
Test Tools ODBC Login
Check user IDs and passwords, and then test the con
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 485/1241
1. Check
2. Test
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 486/1241
Extract Repository Data
Perform a Get to extract repository data
Copies all objects from the server repository to the loca
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 487/1241
Must be performed before compiling
SRF must be based on the full set of Siebel objects
“Get” all pr
extract rep
data
The Big Picture
Steps to create a usable local database
Server
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 488/1241
Template
provides
schema
Server
Database
Repository
Data
Compressed
files provide
user data
Server database
provides
repository data
1. Generate DB template
4. Extract
repository data
2. Extract
user data
Additional Developers
For each additional developer:
1. Create the developer
2 C t l i
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 489/1241
2. Create a user login
3. Extract the local database
4. Initialize the local database5. Verify login and data sources
Server Machine
Server Local Local
Developer
Workstation
Developer
Workstation
Develop
Worksta
Module Highlights
Siebel Remote is used to establish a local developme
environment
An individual developer uses Siebel Developer Web C
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 490/1241
An individual developer uses Siebel Developer Web C
develop and test custom configurations
Create the development environment by: Installing Siebel Tools on the client
Enabling Siebel Remote on the server
Creating a developer, login, and remote user on the se
Generating, extracting, and initializing a local database
Verifying login and data sources
Lab
In the lab you will:
Set up an employee as a developer
Extract a local database for the developer
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 491/1241
Extract a local database for the developer
Populate the developer’s local database with user and
data
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 492/1241
2
Module 22: Managing ObjectDefinitions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 493/1241
Projects
Are named sets of object definitions in a repository
Only one version of a project exists in a repository at a
Are a mechanism to organize object definitions so tha
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 494/1241
Are a mechanism to organize object definitions so tha
developer can exclusively work on them as a group
Accounts Screen
Account (SSE)
Screen
Applets
Views
Account List Applet
Account Entry Applet
Manager’s Account List Vie
Account Profile View
Account List View
All Account List View
Object definitio
property = Acc
x s ng an ew ro ec s
The as-delivered Siebel application contains a large n
existing projects
New projects are created by:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 495/1241
New projects are created by:
Selecting the Project object type, and
Creating a new record in the Object List Editor
Assigning Object Definitions to Projects
Every object definition must belong to one, and only o
Either a Siebel-supplied project, or
A user-created project
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 496/1241
A user created project
A top-level object definition has a Project property
Child object definitions belong to the parent’s project
Child belo
project. It d
projec
Viewing Object Definitions by Project
View object definitions in a project using the Project d
list
Displays object types for which there are object definiti
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 497/1241
Displays object types for which there are object definiti
selected project
Select **All Projects** at the top of list to see all project
1. Select
project
2. Selectobject
type
Repositories
Master copy of repository resides on server database
Stores tested object definitions for entire development
Each developer has repository copy on local develope
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 498/1241
Each developer has repository copy on local develope
workstation
Developers perform all editing on their local repository
Server Machine Developer
Workstation
Developer
Workstation
Develop
Workstat
Server Local
Copying Projects
Check In and Check Out safely manage concurrent u
multiple developers
Object definitions in one or more projects can be copi
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 499/1241
Object definitions in one or more projects can be copi
From the server to the local developer repository (Use
Check Out to retrieve definitions)
From the local developer repository to the server (Chec
Overwrites the version in the destination repository
Server Local
Project1. Developer
uses Get,
Check Out
3. Developer
uses Check In
2. De
mo
ob
Getting Projects
Get populates a local database with a copy of project
server repository
Use Get to bring object definitions modified by other d
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 500/1241
g j y
to your local database
Use Get with All Projects selected to populate a newlylocal database
Check Out
Click Check Out to copy projects from the server repo
the local repository
The project’s Allow Object Locking property must be di
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 501/1241
Check Out Continued
Use Check Out in order to edit object definitions in a p
Copies all object definitions in project on server to loca
Local copy of project is overwritten by server version
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 502/1241
Locks project on server repository
Prevents other developers from modifying that project
Locks the project in the local repository
Permits developer to make changes to object definitions i
Pencil indicates
“writable”
Check Out Objects
Allows for checking out individual objects
Quicker than checking out entire projects
To enable object-level Check Out
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 503/1241
j
Enable object-level Check Out in the [Siebel] section of
Ensure ToolsConstrain parameters = TRUE Add EnableObjectCOCI=TRUE
Log in to Tools as SADMIN to the server database and
project’s Allow Object Locking property
2. Lo
to se
Allow
1. Enable object-
level Check Out in
tools.cfg
Canceling Check Out
Discards changes made to checked-out project if:
Changes are no longer required
Local project has become corrupted
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 504/1241
To cancel a Check Out of a project:
Check out the project from the server again Replaces modified object definitions in local repository wi
version from server repository
Repeating Check Out is permitted for person who last che
project
Then check in the project to unlock the project on both
and server repositories
Undo Check Out
Use Undo Check Out to release lock on a project on t
without checking in edited object definitions
Makes the original project available to another develop
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 505/1241
Can be followed by Get to restore original definitions in
Alternate way to cancel
Check Out
Undo Check Out:
Releases lock on server
Retains lock on local
database
Developer can continue tomodify object definitions but
will not be able to check
them in to the server
Cannot publish
definitions
Check In
Is used when object definitions in the project have be
and tested
Copies object definitions from local repository to server
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 506/1241
Replaces versions of checked out object definitions wit
versions and unlocks projects
Can also check in object definitions in newly created proje
Releases locks on both server and local copies of proje
Maintain Lock leaves project locked for further local modi
current developer
Check In Continued
Click Check In to copy projects and objects from the l
repository to the server repository
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 507/1241
Locking Projects
You can directly lock and unlock projects in the curren
repository (local or server)
Click to
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 508/1241
Or Select Tools > Lock Project
Click to
propert
Locking Projects Locally
Allows developer to make and test modifications loca
Prevents developer from checking changes into serve
repository
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 509/1241
However, locking does not prevent other developers fro
out and modifying a project
Consider when:
Prototyping your ideas without preventing other develo
checking out the project
Intending to discard (rather than save) your work
Server Machine DeveloperWorkstation DeveloperWorkstation DevelopWorkstat
Server Local
Do Not Lock Projects on the Server
Oracle recommends that developers never directly loc
on the server
Prevents the developer from undoing changes and rest
original definitions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 510/1241
original definitions
Allows other developers to get object definitions in an i
inconsistent, and untested state
Always use Check Out and modify the object definitio
Server Machine Developer
Workstation
Developer
Workstation
Develop
Workstat
Server
Local
Module Highlights
Projects organize object definitions so a developer ca
them exclusively
The as-delivered application contains many projects
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 511/1241
Every object definition must belong to one, and only o
Developer edits a copy of master repository residing oclient
Check Out and Check In are used to modify object de
Project locking ensures only one developer can modify
object
Lab
In the lab you will:
Explore how projects work in Siebel Tools
Check out a project from the server
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 512/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 513/1241
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 514/1241
2
Module 23: Editing and CompilingObject Definitions
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Create new and edit existing object definitions
Validate edited object definitions
Archive object definitions and projects
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 515/1241
Archive object definitions and projects
Back up the local database
Compile object definitions into a repository file
Why you need to know:
These are fundamental activities that occur during all c
efforts
Use the Object Explorer and Object List Editor to edit
definitions
Ensure that the project has been locked
Editing Object Definitions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 516/1241
Type in a value, or. . .
Pencil indicates
object is locked
and editable
Creating a New Object Definition
Select the desired object type in the Object Explorer
Create a new record in the Object List Editor
2. Select a project from
the picklist
1. Enter a unique
name
3. Assign values to
properties, as
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 517/1241
p p p ,
Only locked projects
are available for
object creation
Changed Flag
Indicates records that have been modified since the c
date
Is set whenever a record is edited
Is cleared by resetting the changed date value
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 518/1241
Is cleared by resetting the changed date value
Validating Object Definitions
Determines the correctness of selected object definitio
repository
Includes all child object definitions for the selected pare
definitions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 519/1241
Is based on a set of Siebel-defined rules
Error
Warning Use
disa
d
Validating Object Definitions Continued
Select the object definition to validate
Right-click and select Validate
Click Start in the Validate dialog box
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 520/1241
Violations appearin Errors list Click
Valid
d
Archiving Projects
Projects can be archived to .sif files
Select the project (or projects) to be archived
Select Tools > Add to Archive
Select an existing (or create a new) archive file
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 521/1241
Click Save in the Export to Archive File dialog box
Archive Files
Contain projects exported from a repository
Available for importing into other repositories
Have .sif extension by default
Are used to share projects among developers
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 522/1241
Are used to share projects among developers
Are used to back up projects Can be version-controlled using source code control s
Archive file
Archive Recommendations
Archive the entire project
Do not archive individual objects
Could result with inconsistent object definitions
Difficult to recover from a partial or incomplete archive
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 523/1241
Difficult to recover from a partial or incomplete archive
Will only save a few minutes per day compared to arch
project
Archive at appropriate intervals
Prior to implementing a large amount of work
After testing a section of work
Several times per day during heavy development
Importing Object Definitions
Object definitions in an archive file can be imported in
local repository on the developer workstation
Appear in the current active repository
To import object definitions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 524/1241
p j
Select Tools > Import from Archive
Select the archive file
Indicate how to resolve conflicting object definitions
Resolve Import Conflicts
Set the default conflict resolution
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 525/1241
Adjust individual resolutions by right-clicking them in t
differences” list
Compare Objects
Displays differences between the selected object defi
another one:
In the current local repository
In an archive file
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 526/1241
In the repository on the server
Allows developers to identify differences while compa
objects
Delete individual child object definitions
Copy individual child object definitions in either directio
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 527/1241
Compare Objects Continued
Examine the differences in the Compare Objects wind
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 528/1241
Definitions with
difference highlight
Differences displayed
Compare Objects Continued
To compare two object definitions in the developer re
Select two object definitions to be compared (by SHIFT
Select Tools > Compare Objects > Selected
Modifying definitions is supported
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 529/1241
Copy selected control
Delete selected contr
Source Code Control Integration
Automate integration with source code control for repo
data
Creates a
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 530/1241
Check archive
into code
management
system
Creates a
when pro
checke
ODBC to
and lo
databa
Backing Up the Development Database
Is achieved by copying the local database file (.dbf)
Backs up the entire database
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 531/1241
Windows
copy/paste
Compiling
Compile to produce an .srf file to test the configuration
Reads object definitions from repository and creates a
representation to be accessed by siebel.exe at run time
Compile into .srf file located in the objects directory of
li ti
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 532/1241
application
Repository
Data
Object
Manager
Configured
application
Compiling
Compile Projects
When starting and at milestones
Use Compile All Projects to generate a new .srf file
Compile only selected projects or locked projects for
incremental compile
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 533/1241
Back up the .srf file
prior to full compile
To compile projects:
Select Tools > Compile
Projects
Select project or projects
Compile into the
client directory
Copy the .srf file to create backups
Create an initial backup copy before starting developm
Create additional backups after major milestones
Rename the copies and compile into siebel.srf
Backing Up the Configuration File
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 534/1241
Using the original siebel.srf name for development elim
need to edit .cfg files to point to a renamed .srf
Original .srf
Copy .srf file after major
milestones to create backups
Compile into siebel.srf
Rapid Unit Testing
Run-time behavior when usercompiles SRF
If Web client is running:
Allows developers to test changes in a local instance
Developer Web Client
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 535/1241
eb c e s u g
At end of the compile, thebrowser window refreshes
The user is brought back tothe view that was displayedbefore the compile
If Developer Web Client is notrunning:
If user checked auto-start,Web client is started usingdebug setting
Module Highlights
Object definitions can be created and edited once the locked
Validation determines correctness of object definitions
Developer can generate archives that contain exporte
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 536/1241
Share projects for back-up and version-control
Export projects to and import from archive
Highlight import conflicts and project differences
Compile to produce the .srf used to test a configuratio
Compiling:
Reads object definitions from repository tables
Creates a flat file (.srf) accessed by the Siebel applicati
time
Rapid Unit Testing allows developers to test changes
Developer Web Client
Lab
In the lab you will:
Practice editing and validating object definitions in Sieb
Explore the use of diff and archive options in Siebel To
Compile an .srf file
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 537/1241
M d l 24 UI L C fi ti
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 538/1241
2
Module 24: UI Layer Configuration:
Web Templates
Module Objectives
After completing this module you will be able to:
Describe the role of Siebel Web template files
Describe the role of Siebel tags in template files
List the types of templates
Describe how to register associate and bind a templa
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 539/1241
Describe how to register, associate, and bind a templa
Why you need to know
Understanding template structure and how to register,
and bind template files is necessary in order to custom
and feel of your Siebel application
Tailoring the Physical User Interface (UI)
Is performed by editing template files and cascading ssheets
Use an HTML or
a text editor to
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 540/1241
modify layouts
Database
Server
.cfg
UI files
Configuration File
Object
Manager
•Siebel template files
•Cascading style sheets
•Image files
Use a text editor
to modify colors,
fonts, etc.
Siebel Web Template Files
Are HTML files that specify how to render the views foapplication in the user’s browser
Specify the formatting and layout of:
Graphic and text elements
User data
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 541/1241
User data
Consist of standard HTML tags and Siebel-specific sw
<table width="100%" class="banner" cellpadding='0'cellspacing='0' border='0'>
<tr>
<td><img src="images/spacer.gif" height="2 width="10"></td>
<td><swe:menu type="Default" width="275" height="bgcolor="#ccccff" fgcolor="#000000" /></td>
S
H
Siebel Web Template Files Continued
Are stored as separate files outside the Siebel reposit
Located in the WEBTEMPL directory in a Siebel install
Have an .swt extension
Are edited using text or HTML editor of your choice
Can include other template files via swe:include tag
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 542/1241
Can include other template files via swe:include tag
Reference Cascading Style Sheet files (.css)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 543/1241
Cascading Style Sheets
Can be modified to define global parameters Fonts, foreground and background colors, and so forth
Style sheets:
Are located in PUBLIC\enu\FILES directory in a Siebel
Can be modified by customers
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 544/1241
/*globalMenu Definiti/*------------------TR.globalMenu, TD.glo
TD.globalMenu A,TD.globalMenu A:visitTD.globalMenu A:hover{ font-size: 8p
color:#000000background-cofont-weight:n
Can be modified by customers
Edit style sheet files to achieve the desired look and s
your implementation
Backup the current .css files
Edit .css files with your
preferred HTML editor
From main.css
Adjust fonts
Adjust colors
Web Template Object Definition
Is a layer of abstraction between a UI object definition Applet, or Web Page) and the file itself
UI object definitions reference Web Template object d
References an HTML Web template file
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 545/1241
Changes are propagated to all
objects that reference the file
Web Template Placeholders
Contain placeholders for Siebel logical UI definitions
Definitions map to Siebel Web templates
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 546/1241
Placeholder
Web Template Explorer
Is used in Tools to:
Identify template files
included in a template
file
Examine the contents of
Filter
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 547/1241
a template file Invoke an editor to
modify the template file
Highlights Siebel-supplied
tags for easy viewing
Navigate to View >
Windows > Web
Templates Window
P
te
Types of Web Templates
List Applet Web Templates
Form Applet Web Templates
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 548/1241
View Web Templates
Web Page Web Templates
Form Applet Web Templates
Define the layout of form applets Placeholder provides starting point for building applet
Tools’ Web Layout Editor assists you in setting templat
parameters Accou
uses
GWeb Layout Editor
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 549/1241
Object Manager uses
template to build applet
Tools
UI
List Applet Web Templates
Define the layout of a list applet Standard Interactivity list applets use Base and Edit mo
Base Mode
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 550/1241
An e
an
Edit Mode
List Applet Web Templates Continued
High Interactivity clients use EditList mode
EditList Mode
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 551/1241
An ed
EditList
queryin
dire
View Web Templates
Define the layout of a view Common view templates include:
ViewView Basic
View Detail (Parent with Pointer)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 552/1241
View View Basic
Web Page Web Templates
Define the layout of Web pages such as: Login Page
Error Page
Container Page
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 553/1241
The Login Web
template
defines the
layout of the
Login page
Using Template Files
Requires three types of relationships: Registering creates an object definition in the repositor
Associating identifies the Web template used to render
or view
Binding fastens a control to a specific position on the p
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 554/1241
applet to a view
Applets
(View)Templatefile
View
(View) Web template
Appletplaceholders
View Example
Binding
As
Regi
sw
Creates a Web Template object definition to define thname for the template
Creates a Web Template File object definition to refer
actual physical file
Registering a Template File
Logical name in
repository for template
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 555/1241
repository for template
Actual name of the
physical template fi
Associating an Applet with Its Template
Creates an Applet Web Template object definition to sassociated Web template
Different applet modes can reference different Web tem
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 556/1241
A
u
aMode for
the applet
Associating a View with Its Template
Creates a View Web Template object definition to speassociated Web template
Each view references a single view Web template
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 557/1241
Web template u
to render vie
Associating a Web Page with Its Template
Creates a Web Page object definition and sets the WTemplate property
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 558/1241
Web page template used to
render Web page
Binding
Maps the components of an applet or view to placehothe corresponding template file
Information is specified in the repository
View Web Template Item
Applet Web Template Item
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 559/1241
Web Page Item Results in the corresponding element being displayed a
Binding AppletsBinding Controls to Applets
Controls/Lists
(Applet)
Template
file
Binding
Applet
(Applet) Web template
Control
placeholders
Applets
(Vie
Applet
placeholders
Binding
Applet Web Template Items
Are created by the binding process Item Identifier is the “id” attribute value in the swe:contr
Are used at run time by the Siebel Web Engine to ide
controls that make up an applet
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 560/1241
<swe:for-each count="6" startValue="1300" iteratorName="c
<swe:control id="swe:currentId" hintMapType="FormItem">
View Web Template Items
Are created by the binding process Item Identifier is the “id” attribute value in the swe:apple
Are used at run time by the Siebel Web Engine to ide
applets that make up a view
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 561/1241
<swe:applet hintMapType="Applet" id="1" hintText="Parent
Web Page Items
Identify the links and buttons appearing on a Siebel W Item Identifier is the “id” attribute value in the swe:page
Are used at run time by the Siebel Web Engine to pos
links and buttons
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 562/1241
Registering, associating, and binding adds object defithe repository
Summary of Object Definitions
3. Sp
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 563/1241
1.
the
tem
2. Identifies the logical
template used to renderan applet, view, or
container page
comapplet,
pag
Associating
R
B
Module Highlights
Siebel Web Template Files are HTML files that specifrender views for a Siebel application in a user’s brows
Can include other template files
Can reference CSS files
Siebel Tags are a Siebel-developed library of tags in W
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 564/1241
template files processed at run time CSSs can be modified to define global parameters su
fonts and colors
The four Web Template types are Form Applet, List A
View, and Web Page
Template files require three types of relationships: AsRegister, and Bind
Lab
In the lab you will: Examine Web templates
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 565/1241
Module 25: UI Layer Configuration:
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 566/1241
2
Applets
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to: Create and modify a list applet
Create and modify a form applet
Why you need to know:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 567/1241
You may want to display new data in the UI
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 568/1241
Primary Applet Types: Form Applet
Displays a single record Fields for the record are displayed in a grid or form
Can show more fields at once than a list applet
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 569/1241
Creating a List Applet
Follow these steps to create a new list applet …
1. Create new applet object definition
1. Create new applet object definition
2. Associate applet template with object defin
2. Associate applet template with object defin
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 570/1241
…Or use the List Applet Wizard
Automates these steps
Generally the preferred method Ensures that object definitions and properties are creat
Ensures that steps are not omitted
Increases developer productivity
Speeds project completion
3. Bind controls and list columns to te3. Bind controls and list columns to temHighly recommended
List Applet Wizard
Use the List Applet Wizard to create a new applet Select File > New Object, select the Applets tab, select
and then click OK Wizard
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 571/1241
List Applet Wizard Inputs
The List Applet Wizard requires the following inputs: Project the new applet will be part of
Applet name and display title
Business component the applet will reference
The upgrade behavior
Admin Non preservable Preservable
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 572/1241
Admin, Non-preservable, Preservable The Web templates that will be used for each mode
Base and EditList mode are commonly built using Applet
(Base/EditList)
Edit mode is commonly built using Applet List Edit (Edit/N
The business component fields that will appear in the W
Additional controls that will be added to the applet
By default, all of the standard buttons are selected
List Applet Wizard Outputs
Creates required object definitions for controls, lists, acolumns
Associates applet Web templates to the applet
Binds list columns to templates
Appear as applet Web template items
Invokes the Web Layout Editor
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 573/1241
Invokes the Web Layout Editor
List Web Layout Edit
New applet object definition create
Web Layout Editor
Is used to add, remove, and reorder applet Web temp Placeholders correspond to item identifiers of applet W
items
Can be invoked from the right-click menu
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 574/1241
2. Drag and drop
items from theControls/Columns window
Select and right-
click to delete
controls that you
have added
1. Select the mode
Applet Web Templates
Specify which template is used when the applet is disgiven mode
Contains Applet Web Template items
The controls or list columns that have been bound to th
The item identifier that describes where in the applet th
or list columns should appear Specifies which
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 575/1241
or list columns should appear Specifies whichtemplate to use
Spec
colum
List Column Definitions
Specify: The field that is displayed
The display name that appears at the top of the list colu
May reference a symbolic string
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 576/1241
Symbolic Strings
Ensure that the same name appears exactly the samethroughout the application
Define it once, reference it anywhere
Provide a way to manage updates, globally
Are used by user interface objects such as:
Labels
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 577/1241
Labels List columns
Applet titles
Are stored in the repository containing words and phr
in UI definitions
Global Dictionary contains many commonly used terms Symbolic String Locale object type allows language tra
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 578/1241
Form Applet Wizard
Use the Form Applet Wizard to create a new form app Select File > New Object, select the Applets tab, select
Applet, and then click OK
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 579/1241
Form Applet Wizard Inputs
The Form Applet Wizard requires the following inputs Project that the new applet will be part of
Applet name and display title
Business component that the applet will reference
Upgrade behavior
Admin Non-preservable Preservable M d t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 580/1241
Admin, Non preservable, Preservable Modes to use
Edit mode is required for all clients
Uses the Applet Form Grid Layout template
Base mode is required for Standard Interactivity clients on
Business component fields to appear in Web layout
Creates controls and binds them to applet Web templates
Additional controls to be added to applet
By default, all standard buttons are selected
Form Applet Wizard Outputs
The Form Applet Wizard Creates required object definitions for Controls
Associates applet Web templates to the applet
Binds columns to templates
Appear as applet Web template items
Invokes the Grid Layout Editor
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 581/1241
Grid Layout
Editor
invoked
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 582/1241
Grid Layout Editor Continued
Allows drag-and-drop layout editing Supports formatting options such as:
Align controls
Make same
size
Horizontal
spacing
Format
menu. . .
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 583/1241
spacing
Vertical
spacing
Web Controls Toolbar
Supports drag-and-drop creation of controls Contains icons for:
Text controls
Check boxes
Labels HTML
text
HTML
label
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 584/1241
Properties for Editing
No Delete, No Insert, No Merge, No Update are set tothe behavior of the applet
Can also be set at the business component level
Most restrictive settings are always used
Business Component Applet
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 585/1241
Affects all applets referencing
this BC, or. . .
. . .can be custom
each appl
Business Component Applet
Preview the Applet
Right-click and select Preview to see how the applet a When finished, right-click and deselect Preview to retu
Grid Layout Editor
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 586/1241
Right-click to preview
the applet
Module Highlights
List applets: Display records simultaneously in a list
Contain fields for one record displayed in a single row
Form applets display a single record and contain field
record in a grid or form
Applet wizards ensure object definitions are created aare not omitted
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 587/1241
pp jare not omitted
Web Layout Editor is used to add, remove, and reord
template items
List column definitions specify field displayed and disp
Symbolic strings ensure that the same name appearsthe same way throughout the application
Lab
In the lab you will: Modify a form applet using the Grid Layout Editor
Create a new list applet using the wizard
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 588/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 589/1241
Module 26: UI Layer Configuration:
Applications, Screens, and Views
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 590/1241
2
Applications, Screens, and Views
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Tailor applications
Configure how a view is accessed on a screen
Change the order of screen views for a screen
Create and administer a view
Associate a view with a template
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 591/1241
Why you need to know:
Enables you to modify the user interface
Logical User Interface
Specifies the layout of the Siebel application
Consists of:
Applications, screens, views, applets, controls/list colum
This module focuses on views, screens, and applicati
List ColumnUI
Siebel Application Architecture
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 592/1241
TableColumn
Screen
Business
Component
Business
Object
ViewApplet
Field
List Column
or Control
U
Layer
Business
Layer
Data
Layer
1
Re
Focus of
modu
Applications
Are collections of screens through which users can na
Use a container page to display the Siebel Web page
Specify the application-level menus
Application
-levelmenus
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 593/1241
menus
Container
page
The Container Page
Is a Web page that displays the menus, toolbars, scre
and views that appear in the application
Is specified in the Application object definition
One container page per application Container Web
the conta
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 594/1241
Container Page Example: Employee Application
Container page specifies application layout
Application-
level menu Toolbar
Screen tabs
Link bar
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 595/1241
Message bar
View
Application-Level Menus
Are specified in the Menu object type
Application uses
Generic WEB menu…
…which contains…
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 596/1241
Pos
specifie
of appe
Caption sp
text disp
…a list of menu items
Screen Tabs
Contain links to screens
Are defined as page tabs
Child object of the application
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 597/1241
Specifies text
that appears on
the page bar
Specifie
tab ord
in
Screens
Have a child object type called Screen View that spec
views and categories that appear in the screen
Sequence property specifies where the view appears in
Menu Text property defines the text that appears in Sit
Type property defines the type of view within the scree
Four types: Aggregate category, aggregate view, detail ca
detail view
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 598/1241
Specifies where
the view appears
in the screen
Type Property for Screen View
An aggregate category is a container for a set of view
accessible via a link in the linkbar
May also contain subcategories
An aggregate view is a container for a set of views ac
via the visibility filter drop-down list, a link in the link b
Home Page
Aggregate
category
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 599/1241
category
Aggregate
views
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 600/1241
Sequence Editor
Assists in defining where view appears in the applicat
Updates the sequence property of the screen view obje
Lists four screen view types in hierarchy
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 601/1241
Righ
s
Rig
invo
View
Consists of one or more applets
References a business object that defines the relation
between data in the view
Is associated with a Web template that defines its layo
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 602/1241
View and Templates
Views use templates to organize data layout
Menu Branding
Screen Tabs
Toolbars
View
Container Page
Template
View WebTemplate
Form
List
Control
placeholders
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 603/1241
Ticker
Web Template
Tree
Applet
placeholder
Selecting a View Template
Find an existing view that has desired layout
Examine the View Web Template object definition to d
the view template to use
The Account list view…
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 604/1241
…uses the View Detail (Parent with Pointe
View Wizard
Use the View Wizard to create a new view
Select File > New Object, select View, and then click O
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 605/1241
View Wizard Inputs
The View Wizard requires the following inputs:
Project that the new view will be part of
View name and display title
Business object that the view will reference
The upgrade behavior
Admin, Non-preservable, Preservable
The Web templates that will be used
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 606/1241
The applets that make up the view
These applets will appear in the Web layout
View Wizard Outputs
The View Wizard:
Creates a view object
References view to a business object
Associates Web templates to the view
Invokes the Web Layout Editor Creates
view
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 607/1241
Web Layout Editor
Is launched by the View Wizard
Can be launched by right-clicking a view definition in t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 608/1241
Right-click and select
Edit Web Layout
Web Layout Editor Continued
Displays the current layout of the view
Applet window shows the applets available for display
view
Constrained by the view’s business object property
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 609/1241
2. Drop onto
placehol
1. Drag applet
from Appletwindow
View Web Template Items
Are applets that have been bound to a view
Item identifier specifies where they are to appear
Used in the markup language tag that specifies correspon
in a template
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 610/1241
Binds a control to
specific position
on Web page
Register and Assign View
Views must be administered in the client to make them
to users
Navigate to Administration - Application > Views in the
application to register the view
Copy and paste the view name from the object definition
the view record
Navigate to Administration - Application > Responsibiliassign the view to one or more responsibilities
A i th i t d l f it t ti d t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 611/1241
Assign the view to developers for unit testing and to users
testing and production
1. Register the view 2. Assign the view
Module Highlights
Applications are groups of screens through which use
navigate
Screens are containers for views
Screen views come in four types: aggregate view, aggr
category, detail category, and detail view
Views:
Consist of one or more applets
Reference a BO that defines the relationships between
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 612/1241
Reference a BO that defines the relationships between
view
Are associated with a Web template that defines their l
Lab
In the lab you will:
Create a view
Add the view to a screen using a specified view naviga
mechanism
Administer the new view
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 613/1241
2
Module 27: UI Layer Configuration:
Drilldowns
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 614/1241
2
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Configure drilldown to a related view
Enable the thread bar
Why you need to know:
Enables you to add drilldowns to assist users with navi
Enables you to activate the thread bar to assist users
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 615/1241
Navigation Using Drilldown
You can configure list columns or controls for drilldow
When the user clicks the hyperlinked value, the applica
navigates to another view
You can configure drilldown as static or dynamic
Static: Clicking the hyperlink always navigates to the sa
view
Dynamic: Clicking the hyperlink navigates to a target videtermined by values shown in the current view
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 616/1241
Static Drilldown: Same Business Component
Drill down to another view, keeping the business com
(BC) context
Contact record inVisible Contacts
list view
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 617/1241
list view
Same contact
record in Contact
Detail view
Configuring Drilldown Within Same Business Co
Create a new drilldown object
Set the Hyperlink Field and View properties to enable s
drilldown
Drilldown object is child of an applet object
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 618/1241
Specifies the BC field to be
highlighted for drilldown
Sp
ta
Static Drilldown: Different Business Component
Drill down to another view, changing the business com
context
Related account
The account field
contact record i
Contacts list v
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 619/1241
Related account
record in the Account
Detail - Contacts view
Configuring Drilldown to Different Business Com
Create a new drilldown object for the applet
Set Hyperlink field and View properties as before
Set Business Component, Source Field, and Destinatio
properties to enable drilldown to a view based on a diff
record
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 620/1241
BC i
Foreign Key field
in record pointing
to target BC
Primary Key
(default
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 621/1241
Matching Conditions
Identify one or more matching conditions to trigger dri
to a specific target view For example:
Personal
Contact
Detail View
Personal
Contact?
C t t
Y
N
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 622/1241
Determine the order to check the matching conditions Conditions can involve different fields
Multiple matches could occur for a given record
Contact
Detail View
Configuring Dynamic Drilldown
Create the drilldown objects for each view
Multiple drilldown objects with same hyperlink but differ
Set sequence number to determine where to look for
drilldown destinations
The drilldown object with the lowest sequence number
for dynamic drilldown destination child object definition
The Original and Personal
d illd bj t h th
The Original drilldown oblower sequence number, so
for dynamic drilldown de
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 623/1241
drilldown objects have the same
Hyperlink field but different views
for dynamic drilldown de
Configuring Dynamic Drilldown Continued
Create a dynamic drilldown destination definition for e
condition Each condition specifies a destination drilldown object
Recommended practice: Create a default dynamic drill
destination to specify a desired view if there are no ma
If no default is configured, navigates to the view specified
parent drilldown object
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 624/1241
Field to
check
Value to
check for
Separate
definition for
each destination
Destination
Thread Bar
Tracks previous business object (view) and active rec
Updates whenever the user navigates to a different bobject
Provides hyperlinks to previous views
Allows user to backtrack easily
Hyperlink to prior active record in the thread
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 625/1241
Thread Properties
Specifies the text that appears in the thread bar
Specifies the record to
“remember” in the
Thread fieldThread title
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 626/1241
Thread Title property specifies
prior business object in
hyperlink; if not entered,
application uses Title property
hyperlink
Module Highlights
List columns or controls can be configured for drilldow
Drilldowns can be static or dynamic
Static drilldowns always navigate the user to the same
Dynamic drilldowns navigate the user to a target view d
by the values shown in the current view
Static drilldowns can be configured to drill down to the
business component or to a different business compon Thread bar allows user to easily backtrack
C fi d i T l
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 627/1241
Configured in Tools
Lab
In the lab you will:
Create and configure dynamic drilldowns
Enable and configure thread support
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 628/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 629/1241
2
Module 28: Business Layer
Configuration: Joins
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 630/1241
2
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Create a join that brings data from a standard table intobusiness component
Create a join that brings data from a party table into a s
business component
Create a join that brings data from a party table into an
business component
Why you need to know:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 631/1241
y you eed o o
Enables you to configure your company’s business log
Joined Tables Review
Business components can include data from related j
tables Brings in data as needed to meet the business compon
requirements
For display in applets
For use in processing by the business component
Opportunity
Name Sales StageDescription
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 632/1241
S_OPTY
R OW _I D
NAME
DE S C _T E X T
C UR C Y _ C D
S_STG
R OW _I D
NAME
P HA S E _ C D
S T G _ ORDE R
Base table Join
Three Definitions Are Used to Implement a Join R
Join definition specifies the joined table
Join specification specifies the FK and PK used to relbase and joined tables
Single-value field (SVF) references the join object def
1. Join
definition
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 633/1241
2. Join
specification
Join Example
Will bring Sales Stage data from S_STG into the Opp
S_OPTY is the base table, S_STG is the joined table
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 634/1241
From S_OPTY From S_STG
Building a Join
1. Locate the Data Source
2. Examine Existing Joins
3. Diagram the Join
4 Create the Join Definition
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 635/1241
4. Create the Join Definition
5. Create the Join Specification
6. Map the Single Value Field(s)
1. Locate the Data Source
Identify potential data sources
Peruse application for data thatyou seek
The required data could exist in
another business component
Once you find the data in the UI,
identify the specific table and
column where the data resides
Trace down from the UI element
t th t bl l
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 636/1241
to the table column
For assistance, use the job
aid from the Business
Component labIdentify table
and column that
contains data
you seek
2. Examine Existing Joins
Determine if a join already exists
Peruse existing joins for joins that might be candidates Oracle has already provided many commonly-used join
If a join exists that meets data display requirements, u
Otherwise, create a new join
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 637/1241
Examine alias
for candidates
The Join Diagram template simplifies join creation
Gather information first, then create the join
Indicate each of the numbered items
3. Diagram the Join
Business Component: Opportunity
Single Value Field: Sales Stage Id
S OPTY S STG2. Base
Join Diagram Worksheet
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 638/1241
Base Table Joined TableFK PK
C URR _ S
T G _I D
_R OW _I D
R OW _I D
_NAME
table
5. Foreign key
column
4. Create the Join Definition
Table property specifies joined table
Alias property is the name of join definition Alias always defaults to the joined table’s name
Displayed in ALL CAPS
Additional aliases for self-joins or multiple joins to the s
are specified by the developer
Recommended practice is to use Initial Caps
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 639/1241
Joined table
Name of
join
Defaul
joined
5. Create the Join Specification
Specify foreign key field of the base business compon
Source Field property Specify primary key column of the joined table in the D
Column property
Base Table
C URR _
S_OPTYR OW _I
R OW _I
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 640/1241
_ S T G _I D
D D
FK
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 641/1241
An option in the join definition
Set Outer Join Flag to TRUE to return all records fromtable, even when there is no related row in the joined
Outer joins will affect performance
Do not enable outer join if there is always a related row
joined table
Outer Join Flag
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 642/1241
Ou
en
Outer Join Flag Continued
105AT&T
200 PCS CS
Laptop nits001
CURR_
STG_IDDESC_TEXTNAMEROW_ID
S_OPTY
05 – Won102
03 - Closing101
NAMEROW_ID
S_STG
When Outer Join Flag is TRUE (checked), a left outer
used All records in source table are displayed
Even if there is no related record in the target table
Records with no related record in target table display ta
as null
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 643/1241
FKPK
NULL
Broadband
e2e
200 PCS Puma
Laptop EB003
106
Imperial
Tobacco
200 PCS Puma
Laptop EB002
105 AT&TLaptop units001
02 - Qualifica106
01 - Prospec105
06 – Short Li104
07 - Selected103
All records
displayed from
source
No correspo
for Broadba
Joins and Party Business Data
Joins and Party Business Components
Bringing Party Data into a Standard Business Comp
Bringing Party Data into a Party Business Compone
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 644/1241
Joins and Party Business Components Review
Party Business Components have S_PARTY as the b
but store main data in S_PARTY extension tables An implicit join is used to reference fields from extens
Used when relationship between tables is known
Appears in Join property on SFV
Does not appear as Join object definition
S PARTY S CONTACT
Contact
Ma
i
S
First Name Last Name Birth Date
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 645/1241
S_PARTYR OW _I D
NAME
P ART Y _T Y P E _ C D
P ART Y _ UI D
S_CONTACTR OW _I D
F S T _NA
ME
L AF S T _
NAME
P AR _R OW _I D
BI RT H _
DT
FKPK
Bringing Party Data into a Standard Business Co
Example: Bringing account data into the Opportunity b
component for display in an Opportunity applet
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 646/1241
Opportunity
Name AccountDescription
Standard business
component
Data from an S_PARTY
extension table
Three Definitions Bring Party Data into a Standar
The Join definition specifies which S_PARTY extensio
use The Join specification specifies to use PAR_ROW_ID
The SVF is the desired column from the joined extens
1. Join
definition
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 647/1241
2. Joinspecification
3. Single-
value field
Join Specification with Party: Similar to Standard
Destination references PAR_ROW_ID, not ROW_ID
Keys reference base to extension to join, rather than join
Standard Party
S_OPTYR OW
S_STGR OW
NA M
C UR
S_ORG_EXTR OW
P A R
S_OPTYR OW
P R _
T
Typically references
ROW_ID
NA M
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 648/1241
PKFK FFK
Oppty Base Joined Table Oppty Base
W _I D
W _I D
ME
RR _ S T G _I D
W _I D
R _R OW _
I D
W _I D
PK
Joined /
_DE P T _ O U
_I D
ME
Data
resides
in _EXT
001 001
Bringing Party Data into a Party Business Compo
Example: Bringing parent account data into the Accou
display in an Account applet A join in a BC that refers back to data in that same BC
Account
refe
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 649/1241
Account
Name Parent Account Name Parent Account LoLocation
Join Definition, Bringing Party Data into a Party B
Must use an explicit join to an extension table based o
appropriate foreign keys The alias must be different from those used by implicit
BC
Must not use an existing implicit join to that extension
an expl
Since an implicit join to
S ORG EXT already
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 650/1241
. . .an expl
be used,
have
_ _ y
exists. . .
Map Field to Column in Party Table
Select the appropriate explicit join
Do not use an implicit join to the table Select the desired column in the joined table
Set the appropriate type (DTYPE_TEXT, etc.)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 651/1241
Select t
instead o
Module Highlights
BCs can include data from related joined tables
Join definitions and join specifications define how to joined table data
Single-value fields reference the join definition and de
field to access in the joined table
To create a join:
Locate the data source, examine existing joins, diagramcreate the join definition, create the join specification, a
the SVF
Joins that in ol e part data are similar to standard d
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 652/1241
Joins that involve party data are similar to standard d
however, when bringing party data into:
A non-party BC, create a join specification based on PA
A party BC, use the appropriate explicit join
Lab
In the lab you will:
Examine references when a join is not present as well a join is present
Create a join that brings in data from joined table and d
in the UI
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 653/1241
2
Module 29: Business Layer
Configuration: Existing Business
Components and Fields
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 654/1241
2
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Edit business component properties to capture busines Describe business component view modes
Edit field properties to capture business logic
Specify business component and field user properties
Why you need to know: Editing the properties of business components and field
you to more accurately and fully capture your business
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 655/1241
Business Component Properties
Capture business logic
Include: Properties for editing
No Delete
No Insert
No Merge
No Update
Owner Delete
Search Specification
Sort Specification
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 656/1241
Sort Specification
Business Component Properties
Properties for Editing
Owner Delete Property
Search Specification Property
Sort Specification Property
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 657/1241
Properties for Editing
Set editing properties at the business component leve
prevent deleting, inserting, merging, and updating recapplets
Example: To maintain record continuity, users cannot
change price lists once they have been created
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 658/1241
Properties for Editing Continued
These properties also appear on applets
Most restrictive settings are always used
Set these properties to FALSE at the business compon
you can make exceptions at the applet level
Business Component Applet
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 659/1241
Affects all applets referencing
this BC, or. . .
. . .can be custom
each appl
Owner Delete Property
Set the Owner Delete property to TRUE to enable onl
owner of a record to delete it The primary on a team-based business component is t
the record
JRUBIN is primary owner;
only JRUBIN can delete
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 660/1241
Search Specification Property
Specifies records to be retrieved by the business com
Typically used when there are multiple business compobased on the same table
Conditional
t t tBC field
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 661/1241
statement
Search Specification Expression
Consists of field names, constants, functions, logical o
and comparison operators Example: For a given user, Contact(All) retrieves:
All contacts where the Personal Contact flag is “N”
All personal contacts belonging to the user
Field name in [ ]. . . Operator
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 662/1241
Logical operat. . .must
match exactly
Search Specification Considerations
Appear on business component properties and apple
Search specifications are part of the WHERE clause fothat display this business component
Predefined queries may also contribute to the WHERE cla
Search specifications on the applet are combined with
specifications on the business component with an AND
resulting SQL statement
Avoid mutually exclusive search specifications Avoid competing search specifications that preclude re
Li t C lUI
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 663/1241
Screen
Business
Component
Business
Object
ViewApplet
Field
List Column
or Control
UI
Layer
Business
Layer
Sort Specification Property
Determines the sort order of the retrieved records
Use (DESC) or (DESCENDING) to sort that field in rev
Cannot be set at the applet level
. . .configure a
sort specification
M
To sort by last
name, then first
name. . .
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 664/1241
Ensure
exists t
sort s
BusComp View Mode
Specifies that the BC is subject to Access Control
Owner Type property identifies the Access Control meclimits records a user can access
BCs may have multiple access mechanisms
Allows records to be associated with different owner ty
Supports multiple view modes
Identifies the
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 665/1241
Identifies the
Access
Control
mechanism
BusComp View Mode, Example
The Opportunity business component has a position-
BusComp View mode
Invoked when user navigates to the My Opportunities o
Team’s Opportunities view
Visibility MVField property is set to Sales Rep, so app
reads list of positions from Sales Rep MVF to determi
visibility
The My Opportunities view shows records with the use
position listed in the Sales Rep MVF
The My Team’s Opportunities view shows records whe
direct or indirect reports are primaries on the Sales Re
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 666/1241
direct or indirect reports are primaries on the Sales Re
Person- or position-based
BusComp View modes
are invoked by My views
For each
application user’s curre
positions in S
Field Properties
Customize fields by editing property values
Setting field properties at the business component levthem across all applets that reference the business co
Each applet references one, and only one, business co
Propert
busines
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 667/1241
level affe
that re
busines
Business Component Field Properties
Required and Read Only
Validation
Default Values
Calculated Fields
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 668/1241
Required and Read Only Properties
Setting Required to TRUE prevents user from leaving
Setting Read Only to TRUE prevents user from editin
1. Contacts require
last names
2. Required
marked w
asteris
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 669/1241
3. Attempting
without last na
error mes
Validation Property
Checks the rule when a record is saved to ensure tha
data is valid
Message is customizable
Can refer only to business component fields in the sa
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 670/1241
Birth datemust be
prior to the
current date
Text displayedwhen
validation fails
Specifyexisting string
in SRF. . .
. . .or enter acustom
message
Validation Property Continued
Rules are expressed as a combination of logical oper
constants, field names, and predefined functions
Constant
Operator
Field name
Logical operator
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 671/1241
Default Values for Fields
Pre Default Value
Automatically assigns a value to a field for a new recor
Post Default Value
Assigns a value to a field, if not entered by the user, be
record is inserted into the database
Example: If the user does not designate a contact as
the system assumes it is not personal, and sets it to N
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 672/1241
Calculated Fields
Derive their value from values in other fields in the sa
of the business component in which the calculated fie
Cannot be stored in the database; therefore, there is
associated column
To enable, set Calculated property to TRUE (checked
Column
is empty
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 673/1241
calculated
stored in t
Restrictions on Calculated Fields
Calculated fields are read-only
System does not validate values of calculated fields Sorting on calculated fields is not supported
Querying on calculated fields is supported
Performance depends upon whether functions in the qu
expression can be incorporated into the SQL statemen
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 674/1241
Calculated Value Property
Is an expression built from:
Field names in the same business component
Field names from the parent business component
Current BC must have the child in a detail view
Standard functions
String, numeric, and logical operators
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 675/1241
System fu
User Properties
Are object definitions added as children to an applet,
component, control, field, or list column
Used to configure specialized behavior beyond what
configured in the parent object definition's properties
Each user property contains its own conditional logic
Can implement specific, custom IF/THEN logic
Many use their own unique syntax
Can be used as a declarative alternative to scripting
A wide variety of user properties exist, such as:
BC Read Only Field, Field Read Only Field, and On Fie
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 676/1241
Set
BC User Property Scenario
Business challenge
Based on values the end user enters at run time, dyna
disallow updates to record
Business solution
Use the BC Read Only Field user property
Allows you to specify a field on the business component t
determines whether individual records are read-only
Example: Shipped orders cannot accept changes to orline item records in an existing order
Order has shipped, and it is too late to add more line item
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 677/1241
Order Entry
- Line Items
Order Entry
- Line Items
Y
N
BC Read
Only FlagField that flags
whether record
is read-only
Target
BC
Read-onl
Writable
User Property, BC Read Only Field Example
Create a calculated field on the Order Entry – Line Ite
business component whose value is either Y or N
BC Read Only Field user property requires an input va
N, so create a calculated field whose values are limited
two values
For this example, create a calculated field named BC
Flag with the expression: IF([Status] = "Shipped", "Y"
This sets the value of the calculated field to Y if the stashipped, N otherwise
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 678/1241
BC Read Only Flag SVF has a
value of Y if the status of the
item is shipped, N otherwise
User Property, BC Read Only Field Example Contin
Add the BC Read Only Field user property
Set the Value property to BC Read Only Flag
Value is the name of the calculated field on the BC
When the value of this field is “Y”, the current record is
Create User Pro
references the ca
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 679/1241
User Property, Field Read Only Field
Sets a specific field in a business component to be re
Field Read Only Field: Location sets Location field as t
a conditional statement
Value is the name of a field that contains a Boolean va
At run-time, if condition is met, field is set to read only
This condition
ff t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 680/1241
. . .depending on the
Boolean value in this field
. . .this target field. . .
S_ORG_EXT
Y1
INT_ORG_FLGROW_ID
affects. . .
Location is
not read
only
N
INT_ORG_FLG
Adding a User Property
Is done via a picklist in the Name property in the Busi
Component User Properties window
Only those user properties allowed for parent BC are d
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 681/1241
Displays user properties
allowed for this BC
Module Highlights
BC properties are set to control behavior:
Editing properties, Owner Delete, Search Specification
Specification
BC field properties are set to control behavior:
Required, Read Only, Validation, Pre and Post Default
Case
BusComp View Mode specifies BC is subject to acces
Calculated fields derive their value from other fields in
record of the BC in which the calculated field resides
User Properties have their own specialized logic that
added to a BC
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 682/1241
added to a BC
Declarative alternative to scripting
Lab
In the lab you will:
Incorporate business logic into the application by confi
properties of business components and fields
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 683/1241
3
Module 30: Business Layer
Configuration: New Business
Components and Fields
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 684/1241
3
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Create a new business component (BC)
Add a business component to a business object
Why you need to know:
Enables you to incorporate additional business entities
correspond to business components in a standard Sieb
application
Enables you to tailor your business logic
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 685/1241
Business Challenge
Siebel-provided business components capture most c
used business entities, but they do not cover every po
Example: Sales organizations might record personal d
contacts, such as:
What colleges the contact attended
Name of college, years attended, major field of study, spo
honors received, and so on
The contact’s favorite restaurants Name and location, price range, type of cuisine, and so o
To capture this kind of information may require:
Multiple fields to capture the details
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 686/1241
1:M or M:M relationship to the parent
Business Solution: Create New Business Compo
To capture this sort of information, create new busine
components
For example, create college and restaurant child BCs o
Contact parent BC
Used to add entities specific to your organization that
the Siebel repository
You can base these business components on tables s
Oracle Standard
Extension
1:M
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 687/1241
M:M
Scenario: 1:M Relationship With Existing Table
Example: Create Colleges Attended and Favorite Res
business components for sales organization
Colleges Attended and Favorite Restaurants have a 1
relationship with Contact
Requires two business components, Colleges Attended
Favorite Restaurants
One for Contact : Colleges Attended
One for Contact : Favorite Restaurants
When creating a BC with a 1:M relationship with the p
business component, consider using a 1:M extension
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 688/1241
Colleges Attended FavoRestauContact
Review: Standard 1:M Extension Tables
Predefined in the repository for many business compo
Have name of parent table appended with _XM
Contains many predefined
ATTRIB columns of varying
type
NAME column stores thename of the child entity
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 689/1241
PAR_ROW_ID column
stores foreign key toROW_ID in main table
TYPE column identifies the
child business component
User Key
TYPE, PAR_ROW_ID, and NAME serve as a user ke
table
These three columns are required
Must provide values for all three columns when creating a
Combined value of the three columns must be unique
S_CONTACT_XMR OW _I D
T Y P E
P AR _R OW _
NAME User Key
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 690/1241
_I D
Business Component Wizard
Use the Business Component Wizard to create a new
component
Select File > New Object, select BusComp, and then cl
Wiza
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 691/1241
Business Component Wizard Inputs
The Business Component Wizard requires the followi
Project new business component will be part of
Business component name
Must be unique among all business components in all pro
The business component’s table name
Fields that will be part of this BC
Selected in the wizard by specifying Table Column, then
field name Specify TYPE column and relate it to Type field
Specify PAR_ROW_ID column and relate it to Id field
Specify NAME column and relate it to Name field
Use ATTRIB_ columns for additional data
E
U
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 692/1241
Columns are limited to the table you select in wizard
Use a separate column for each field
Business Component Wizard Outputs
The Business Component Wizard:
Creates a business component object and its child obje
definitions
Creates fields and relates them to table columns
Aside from what you specify in the wizard, uses default fie
values; for example, Owner Delete is set to FALSE
Creates new
fields and relates
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 693/1241
fields and relates
them to columns
Set the Pre-Default Value
Automatically assigns a value to a field for a new reco
For extension tables, set Predefault Value property of t
field to the value used in the BC search specification
Can be used to ensure that the user key is populated
Matches the v
in the Sear
Specificati
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 694/1241
Ensure
recordsof “R
Set Search Specification
Manually set the search specification to match the un
value for the business component
Specifies the records to be retrieved by the business co
Typically used with extension tables
Supports the case where multiple BCs are based on th
extension table
Search r
records
of “Re
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 695/1241
of Re
Colleges
Attended
Multiple Business Components
You can use one table to map multiple user-defined c
business components
Each BC has a unique TYPE value
Stored in the TYPE column of the table
Each BC retrieves only those rows with its TYPE valu
Specify properties on business components and fields
Search Specification
Pre Default Value
S_R OW _I DType = College
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 696/1241
D
FavoriteRestaurants
Type = Restaurant
Post-Creation Tasks
1. Relate Child and Parent BCs
2. Reference Business Component in Business Obje
3. Enable Display Data in UI
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 697/1241
Relate Child and Parent BCs
For each child/parent relationship, associate the newl
configured child business component to the parent:
Create a link definition to relate child and parent record
Favorite
Restaurants
Parent
Colleges
Attended
Contact
Contact/FavoriteRestaurants Link
Contact/Colle Attended Lin
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 698/1241
Child Child
Relate Child and Parent BCs Continued
Create a separate link for each
child/parent relationship
In our scenario, Contact/FavoriteRestaurants and Contact/Colleges
Attended
Link creation is same as with any
standard BC
This will be the link you specify in thebusiness object
Parent
i
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 699/1241
is
Contact
Reference Business Component in Business
Create a Business Object Component definition for ea
business component
The business object defined for the parent is the one to
The business component is the child you just created
Set the Link property
Parent
BC
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 700/1241
Child
BC
Link you
just created
Enable Display Data in UI
Build applets and views as required to display data fro
business component
To prevent users from changing the value, do not displfield
A
W
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 701/1241
Creating a Standalone Business Component
May be necessary when your company's business log
a new table be added to the database
In most cases, Siebel's extensive database should meeyour needs. There could be exceptions.
To create a standalone BC:
Create a new table to hold BC data
Add appropriate columns to this table
Create a new BC and add BC fields Create a new Business Object and reference the BC in
Enable data display in the UI
Standalone BCs are based on standalone tables and h
relationships to other BCs or tables
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 702/1241
relationships to other BCs or tables
Module Highlights
Create a new BC as child of an existing BC to capture
information
When possible, use predefined _XM tables to store d
Use the BC Wizard to create a new BC
When using extension tables, use one extension table
multiple child BCs
Each BC has a unique TYPE value
Specify properties on BC and fields
Include required fields, such as Type and NAME
Create a link definition to associate new child BCs wit
Add new BC to a BO, then create applets and views t
d t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 703/1241
data
Create a standalone BC, when necessary
Lab
In the lab you will:
Create and display a new business component based
extension table
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 704/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 705/1241
3
Module 31: Business Layer
Configuration: Picklists
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 706/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe the differences between dynamic and static p
Administer a list of values
Configure a static or dynamic picklist
Why you need to know:
Enables you to add picklists to your Siebel application
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 707/1241
Picklists
Allow users to populate one or more single-value field
selecting a value from a list
Enforces business rules and policies Makes data entry faster
Reduces errors
Can be either static or dynamic
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 708/1241
Static Picklist
Displays values in a drop-down list for user selection
Copies the selected value into destination field
No link to the original picklist data
Can be bounded or unbounded
Bounded picklist forces users to enter only a value in th
Unbounded picklist permits users to enter any value int
Draws values from picklist data managed by an admin
Values displayed in static picklists do not change during
D d
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 709/1241
Drop-down
listUI visual cue for
static picklist
Static Picklist Values
Are stored for all static picklists in the S_LST_OF_VA
Appear in List of Values or LOV Explorer administrativ
Administration – Data > List of Values (or LOV Explorer
Each have a type, which indicates which static picklist
belongs to
Values for
the MR MS
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 710/1241
the MR_MS
static picklist
Administering a Static Picklist
Use Administration – Data > List of Values Explorer v
Select an existing picklist or create a new picklist
the List of Values - Types applet
Expand the type and select the child Values folde
Edit the picklist values in the List of Values (LOV)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 711/1241
Dynamic Picklist
Displays values in a pick applet
Draws values from a business component (BC) with r
edited by users Values are dynamic and depend on current BC records
Is used to update joined fields
Copies foreign key reference to the selected value into
field
UI visual cue for
dynamic picklistPick ap
displayed
select icon
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 712/1241
Picklist Terms
Siebel picklists:
Are associated with a field in the originating business c
Draw values from a pick business component
Opportunity: originating
business component
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 713/1241
Account: pick
business component
Create a New Picklist
Use the Pick List Wizard to create a new static or dyn
picklist
Select File > New Object > Pick List
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 714/1241
Wizard Inputs for a Static Picklist
The Pick List Wizard requires the following inputs:
Project the created picklist object will be part of
Business component and field populated by the picklist Picklist name and type (Static)
Business
component andfield populated
by the picklist
Pi
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 715/1241
Wizard Inputs for a Static Picklist Continued
The Pick List Wizard requires the following inputs (con
Bounded or unbounded picklist
Type value (example: MR_MS) Pick list values
May use existing type and/or values in S_LST_OF_VAL
Enter values
for static
picklist
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 716/1241
Pick List Wizard Outputs for a Static Picklist
The Pick List Wizard creates:
A picklist object
A pick map that specifies values copied to the S_LST_Otable
Values in S_LST_OF_VAL for the picklist
Activated drop-down list column or control in applets co
the originating field
o
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 717/1241
Drop-down
control
Activating a Drop-Down List Column or Control
The Pick List Wizard may activate drop-down control
field
The wizard displays all applets displaying the originatin Only the applets locked by developer will be activated
Wizard sets list column or control Runtime property to
A drop-down arrow appears as a cue
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 718/1241
Ru
Wizard Inputs for Dynamic Picklists
The Pick List Wizard requires the following inputs:
Project the created picklist object will be part of
Originating business component and field for the picklis Picklist name and type (Dynamic)
Originating
business
component andfield
Set type
Dynam
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 719/1241
Wizard Inputs for Dynamic Picklists Continued
The Pick List Wizard requires the following inputs (con
A pick business component
A field in the pick business component to sort on A picklist name
A search specification
Pick busines
component
Business
component fie
to sort on
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 720/1241
Wizard Inputs for Dynamic Picklists Continued
The Pick List Wizard requires the following inputs (con
Pick applet properties (No Delete, No Insert, No Update
Merge) Values for a pick map, mapping fields between originat
business components
Defin
m
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 721/1241
Pick List Wizard Outputs for a Dynamic Picklist
The Pick List Wizard creates:
A picklist object
A pick map constructed in the wizard A new pick applet, if needed
Activated list column or control in applets containing the
field
List column or control for originating field must have Runti
set to TRUE
o
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 722/1241
o
Field w
ic
Constrained Picklist
Filters values dynamically based on value in parent pi
Values available
when Area is
NetworkVa
w
Parent picklist
Constrained
child picklist
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 723/1241
Constraining a Picklist
Create a pick map definition for each field that must m
Set the Constrain property to TRUE for each of the m
fields Filters the pick business component records for matche
Does not copy values for the field
Constrained to
return only Sub- Areas whose
Parent is equal to
the Current Area
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 724/1241
Module Highlights
Picklists allow selection of values from a list for one or
single-value fields in an originating business compone
Static picklists: Display values in a drop-down list
Contain static values, which are managed through List
administrative views
Store values in S_LST_OF_VAL table
Dynamic picklists: Display values in a pick applet
Contain dynamic data, which is typically the result of us
transactions
Access data in pick business component using a foreig
Picklists are created using Siebel Tools’ Pick List Wiza
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 725/1241
Picklists are created using Siebel Tools Pick List Wiza
Lab
In the lab you will:
Create a new static picklist
Create a new dynamic picklist
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 726/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 727/1241
3
Module 32: Configuring Multi-Value
Groups
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 728/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 729/1241
Multi-Value Group
A multi-value group (MVG) is a set of detail (child) rec
associated with a parent record
The Parent applet displays only one of the child record The MVG applet opens on demand to display all child r
MVG applet
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 730/1241
Multi-Value Group Continued
Is an alternative to a detail view for managing parent
child records
Makes effective use of space Does not require dedicated space on a view
Allows for multiple sets of detail records to be available
single view
Business Address Account
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 731/1241
MVG Team MVG
Multi-Value Group Continued
Allows users to access child records for multiple pare
in a single list view
Business AddressMVG
TerritoryMVG
IndustrMVG
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 732/1241
Multi-Value Group Continued
Allows for creating queries that include values for field
parent and child records
Quer
Organ
QuerIndus
Quer
Terr
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 733/1241
Primaries
Primary key allows fast retrieval of the primary child re
display in the parent applet
A primary refers to a designated child record
Designating a primary allows one child record to be ret
quickly for display
Supported by a primary foreign key field in the parent
component to reference the child’s primary key (ROW
Siebel Data Model includes many primary foreign keys
S_ORG_EXTR O W _I D
NAME
L O C
P R _ADDR _I D
S_ADDR_ORGR O W _I D
ADDR
CI TY
O U _I D
Primary
Child BParent BC
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 734/1241
Foreign
key
foreignkey
Primaries Performance Example
Three MVGs on a list applet displaying 10 parent reco
requires 31 queries to populate without primaries
One query to populate parent fields in list applet
30 queries (three per parent record) to populate the MV
Multi-value groups
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 735/1241
Primaries Performance Example Continued
Using primaries, one query will populate all the fields
applet
A query using SQL joins populates each MVG with its pchild record
Multi-value groups
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 736/1241
Object Types Supporting MVGs
MVGs are implemented in Siebel applications using th
following object types:
Link
Multi-Value Field (MVF)
MVG Applet
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 737/1241
Link
Must exist between parent and
child business components in
the MVG
Specifies how to get data
from child business
component
Account
Name Location City
Child business
component
Parent business
component
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 738/1241
Business Address
City Street Address
Multi-Value Field (MVF)
Is a field in the parent business component that refere
field in the child business component
Is required for an MVG
S_ORG_EXTR O W _I D
NAME
L O C
EMP _ C O U N
T
Business Addres
Chi
co
Account
City Stre
Parent business
component
Single-value field Multi-value field
Name Location City
S_ADDR_ORGR O W
CI TY
ADD
ZI P C
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 739/1241
T W _I D
TY DR PC ODE
MVG Applet
Displays child business component records
Displays list columns that allow the user to distinguish
record
MVG applets’ type is MVG
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 740/1241
Creating a Multi-Value Group
Use the MVG Wizard in Siebel Tools to create a multi
group
Verify that a link between the parent and child businesscomponents exists
Select File > New Object > MVG
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 741/1241
Inputs to the MVG Wizard
Provide the following information to the MVG Wizard:
The project that the MVG will belong to
The master (parent) and detail (child) business compon
The name of the multi-value link
The Auto Primary property (discussed later)
The link properties
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 742/1241
Setting Auto Primary Property in the MVG Wizard
Set the Auto Primary property to either:
Default (the first child record becomes the primary)
Selected (the highlighted record becomes the primary)
None (the user must specify the primary)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 743/1241
MVG Wizard Output
The MVG Wizard creates an MVG
If no suitable MVG applet exists suitable for the choic
and child business components and MVFs, the wizardthe MVG Applet Wizard
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 744/1241
Multi-Value Groups for M:M Relationships
MVGs can be built on M:M relationships as well
Link must specify the Inter Table property
S_ORG_EXTR O W _I D
NAME
L O C
_P R _I ND U S T _I D
S_ORG_INDUSTR O W _I D
O U _I D
I ND U S T _I D
PK PK
S_INDUR O W _I D
NAME
SI C
Ch
Account
Name Location Industry
Industry
Name
Parent BC Multi-valuefield
Intersection
table
Primary
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 745/1241
FK FK
PK PK
Configuring MVGs for M:M Relationships
Create object definitions required for 1:M MVGs
Specify an association applet for the MVG applet
Allows users to select other child records to add to the
Association
applet
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 746/1241
Module Highlights
A multi-value group (MVG) is a set of detail (child) rec
associated with a parent record
A primary is a designated child record that is displayeparent’s applet
Speeds retrieval of parent record with primary child rec
display in UI
Supported by a primary foreign key
Objects needed to support an MVG are:
Multi-value fields (MVFs)
A multi-value link
A MVG applet
Use the MVG Wizard to create an MVG in Siebel Too
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 747/1241
Lab
In the lab you will:
Create a new MVG
Create an MVG applet to display the MVG
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 748/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 749/1241
3
Module 33: Data Layer
Configuration
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 750/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Create extension columns in a table
Create custom tables
Standalone table
1:1 extension table
1:M extension table
Intersection table
Why you need to know:
Enables you to incorporate additional attributes and bu
entities into a Siebel application
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 751/1241
Incorporating Additional Data
Your business requirements may include:
Adding new fields to capture additional data
Creating new business components to capture addition
entities
Extending the Siebel database can satisfy these requ
Adding one or more columns to an existing table
Creating new database tables to support new business
components
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 752/1241
Prior to extending the Siebel database, consider using
Unused Columns in an Existing Table
Existing 1:M Extension Table
Evaluate the Existing Database Tables
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 753/1241
Unused Columns in an Existing Table
Consider mapping new fields to unused columns in an
base or 1:1 extension table
Verify that the candidate column has the desired type
Consider possible upgrade conflicts in future releases
Consider performance impact of a join to the 1:1 exten
1:1 extension
table of S_OPTY
Unused columns
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 754/1241
Existing 1:M Extension Tables
Consider mapping the new business component to an
appropriate 1:M extension table (as discussed in an e
module)
Verify that the business component has the correct M:1
relationship to the candidate parent business compone
FavoriteRestaurants
Contact
New business
component has M:1
relationship to parent
(Contact)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 755/1241
Extending the Database
Changes the database schema and requires propaga
changes to:
Other developers during development
Mobile users after development for applications in prod
Production enterprise at completion of development an
Requires creating additional object definitions to:
Map columns in the EIM tables needed to import and e
to the extension columns and tables
Specify how data for these extension columns and tabl
routed to remote users (Dock Objects)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 756/1241
Using Siebel Tools to Extend the Database
Supports creating new:
Extension columns on tables
Standalone tables
1:1 extension tables
1:M extension tables
Intersection tables
Creates new object definitions for the database exten
Invokes a wizard to build new tables
Makes the corresponding physical database changes
Developers do not create, use, or maintain SQL scripts
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 757/1241
Best Practices for Extending the Siebel Database
General suggestions:
When adding a new column:
If column is not often populated, use an existing column i
extension table if available
If field often populated, avoid join overhead by using addi
extension column to base table
If data for column appears in:
A form applet, prefer an existing column in an extension t
A list applet, prefer an extension column in the base table
Join overhead can be significant when displaying many reco
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 758/1241
Creating a Custom Extension Column
Make logical changes to the Data layer
Check out the appropriate project
Select the table to be extended
Create a new column record with the desired propertie
Name automatically prefixed with X_
Extensioncolumn
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 759/1241
Creating a New Table
Use the Table Wizard to create a new table
Select File > New Object > Table
Four types of table can be created: Standalone table
1:1 extension table
1:M extension table
Intersection table
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 760/1241
Creating a Standalone Table
Table wizard creates a standalone table with:
Data (Public) as its type
Nine system columns
One index P1 on ROW_ID
System
columns
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 761/1241
Creating a 1:1 Extension Table
Provide a base table as input to the Table Wizard
Choice restricted to the Data (Public) type
Multiple extension tables relate directly to the base tab
to each other
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 762/1241
Creating a 1:1 Extension Table Continued
The Table Wizard creates an extension table with:
Ten system columns
Required nine system columns
PAR_ROW_ID column as the foreign key column to the b
Two indexes:
P1 index on ROW_ID
U1 index on PAR_ROW_ID and CONFLICT_ID
S_PROD_INTR O W _I D
NAME
P ART _ N UM
U OM _ CD
CX_PROD_INT_XR O W _I D
NE W C OL UM N
P AR _R O W _I D
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 763/1241
Creating a 1:M Extension Table
Create if the parent table does not have an existing 1
Provide a parent table as input to the Table Wizard
Choice restricted to the Data (Public) type
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 764/1241
Creating a 1:M Extension Table Continued
Table wizard creates an 1:M extension table with:
Data (Public) as its type
Ten system columns
Nine required columns
PAR_ROW_ID column as the foreign key column to the b
TYPE and NAME columns
Three indexes:
P1 index on ROW_ID
U1 index on PAR_ROW_ID, TYPE, NAME, and CONFLIC M1 index on TYPE and NAME
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 765/1241
Creating an Intersection Table
Select both parent tables
Choices restricted to the Data (Public) type
Specify the foreign key column name for each parent
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 766/1241
Creating an Intersection Table Continued
Table Wizard creates an intersection table with:
Data (Intersection) as its type
Nine system columns
Two foreign key columns as specified
Three indexes:
P1 index on ROW_ID
U1 index on two foreign key columns, TYPE, and CONFL
F1 index on foreign key to second parent table
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 767/1241
Applying and Propagating Database Changes
Test changes locally before applying them to the serv
database
Reduces the likelihood of undesired changes to the se
Best practices for changing the schema:
1. Apply Changes to the Local Database
2. Propagate Changes to the Server Database
3. Propagate Changes to Other Developers
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 768/1241
1. Apply Changes to Local Database
Click Apply/DDL to make the physical database chan
Choice to apply schema changes or generate DDL scr
Changes are preserved across Siebel application upgr
Compile relevant objects and projects
Test changes locally before checking in to the server
Query tables/columns using a database SQL utility
New table
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 769/1241
2. Propagate Changes to Server Database
Check project into the server
Copies the table and column object definitions
Does not apply those changes to the server database s
Apply changes to the server database
To make changes visible, press the Activate button on t
object on the server machine
Compile and test against the server database
Apply
Server Machine Developer
Workstation
Developer
Workstation
Dev
Work
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 770/1241
Check in
3. Propagate Changes to Other Developers
Other developers need to apply changes to their loca
databases
Have other developers Get or check out the project and
changes locally Alternatively re-extract developers and have them get a
Server Machine Developer
Workstation
Developer
Workstation
Deve
Works
Get/
Check out
Get
Check
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 771/1241
Module Highlights
Alternatives to extending Siebel database schema:
Utilize unused columns in an existing table
Use an existing 1:M extension table if appropriate
Extend the Siebel database in Siebel Tools:
Add an extension column to an existing table
Use the Table wizard to create a new table:
Standalone
1:1 extension table
1:M extension table
Intersection table
Best practices to modify Siebel database schema:
Apply changes locally and test
Propagate changes to the server database
Propagate changes to other developers
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 772/1241
Lab
In the lab you will:
Create a custom extension column on a table
Check in configuration and apply to the server databas
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 773/1241
3
Module 34: Siebel Business
Services
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 774/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe a business service
Describe the structure and role of property sets
Use the business service simulator to test a business s
Why you need to know:
Business services are an important building block for S
workflow
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 775/1241
Automating Business Processes
A business process is a series of activities executed to
a specific business objective
Example: the Quote to Cash business process (how an
creates a quote and converts it to an order for submissi Automation options within the Siebel application can a
such challenges as:
Maintaining and standardizing consistent business proc
across all business units
Routing and assigning tasks accurately and efficiently
Responding in a timely, effective manner to customer in
service requests
Assisting users with the implementation of best practice
Offering consistent and personalized service to custom
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 776/1241
Siebel Workflow
Is a set of capabilities to extend the functionality of Sie
applications by automating business processes
Includes capabilities such as:
Workflow Processes
Automates steps in a business process
Workflow Policies
Invokes workflow process under specified conditions
Tasks
Guides users through a series of views to complete a stepprocess
Assignment Manager
Automates assignment of data (such as opportunities and
requests) to the desired people
State Model
Enforces a limited life cycle for select business entities
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 777/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 778/1241
Prebuilt Business Services
Siebel repository contains many prebuilt business serv
support processing in areas such as
Customer order management
ISS Credit Check Service ISS Shipping Cost Service
ISS Tax Calculation Service
Enterprise application integration
EAI Siebel Adapter
EAI HTTP Transport
XML document processing
XML Hierarchy Converter
XML Converter
Enforcing customer business rules
Business Rule Service
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 779/1241
Repository-Stored Business Services
Some business services are stored in the Siebel repos
Siebel-developed business services
Are written in C++
Cannot be modified by customers Custom business services developed by users
Are written in Siebel Visual Basic or eScript
Are created and modified by customers using Siebel Tools
Custom business service
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 780/1241
Client-Stored Business Services
Some business services are stored in the client datab
Siebel-developed business services
Custom business services developed by users
Client-stored business services
Are written in Siebel Visual Basic or eScript
Are created and modified by customers using the Admi
Business Services screen
Are never executed if there is a repository-stored busin
of the same name
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 781/1241
Methods
A business service consists of one or more operations
methods
Each method has a set of input and output arguments,
specified type
StringManipulation
Length
Truncate
Concatenate
InputString
String
InputString
String
String1
String
String2
String
OutputString
String
OutputString
String
Length
Number
Length
Number
Business service
Input arguments MethodOutput argu
Argu
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 782/1241
Identifying Methods for a Business Service
In Siebel Tools, navigate to Business Service | Busine
Method
Name that appe
client when sele
business service
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 783/1241
Identifying Arguments and Types for a Method
In Siebel Tools, navigate to Business Service | Busine
Method | Business Service Method Arg
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 784/1241
Invoking a Method
Involves:
Assigning values to the input parameters
Not all input parameters are required to have values
Retrieving the values assigned to the output parameter
StringManipulation
Length
Truncate
Concatenate
InputString
String
OutputString
String
Length
Number
Siebel 4 Sieb
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 785/1241
Property Set
Is the in-memory data structure used to:
Pass a set of input arguments into a method
Receive a set of output arguments from a method
Output
property
set
Input
property
set StringManipulation
Length
Truncate
Concatenate
InputString
String
OutputString
String
Length
Number
Siebel 4 Sieb
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 786/1241
Property Set Continued
Represents data using name/value pairs
Has two predefined properties: Type and Value
Has an array for storing user-provided name/value pa
Is automatically created and populated when invoking
business services from a Siebel workflow or task
Type
Value
InputString Sieb
Length 4
Predefined
property
names
Values for predefined
properties
Array of user-prov
name/value pair
Input property
set
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 787/1241
Testing a Business Service
Use the business service simulator in the Siebel Clien
Navigate to Administration - Business Service > Simula
Select the business service and method
Create the property set name/value pairs Optionally load data from an input file
Input property
set
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 788/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 789/1241
Module Highlights
A business service is a unit of functionality that is reus
globally accessible
Can be stored in the repository or in user database tabl
Consist of one or more methods Each method is specified by a set of input and output argu
A property set is an in-memory data structure consisti
name value pairs
A business service
Is invoked by passing in the input arguments in a prope Returns the output arguments in a property set
Use the business service simulator to test a business
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 790/1241
Lab
In the lab you will:
Import a custom business service into the repository
Examine the methods and arguments for a business se
Use the business service simulator to test a business sexamine the output property sets
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 791/1241
3
Module 35: Building Siebel
Workflow Processes
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 792/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
List the types of workflow processes and workflow step
Create a new workflow process and configure business
Siebel operation, and decision steps
Why you need to know:
Siebel workflow processes are one of several declarati
techniques to automate business logic
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 793/1241
Workflow Process
Is an ordered set of steps executed in response to a d
of conditions
Is used to automate parts of a business processes in
application
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 794/1241
W kfl P St
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 795/1241
Workflow Process Steps
Siebel workflow processes consist of different types o
Sub process
step
Decision
point step
Business
service step
User
Start step
End s
eSales – Complete Checkout Process
W kfl P St
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 796/1241
Workflow Process Steps Continued
All workflow processes have a:
Start step
End step
Workflow processes often include the following comm Business service step
Siebel operation step
Decision point step
Start step
End step
Si b l O ti St
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 797/1241
Siebel Operation Step
Performs the following operations on a business com
Insert
Update
Delete Query
Next record and previous record operations supported for
over multiple records returned by a query
Queries the Contact
business component
Business Service Step
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 798/1241
Business Service Step
Invokes a method of a business service
Invokes the Truncate method of the
StringManipulation business service
Decision Point Step
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 799/1241
Decision Point Step
Allows a workflow to branch to one of multiple steps b
the value of inputs
If input = yes
If inp
Process Properties
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 800/1241
Process Properties
Process properties are variables that store inputs use
outputs produced by workflow steps
Each workflow process has a set of process propertie
persist while the workflow process is executing Some are populated when the workflow process is invo
Some return data to invoking workflow process or busi
upon completion
Some of default pro
appear in all wo
Process Properties C ti d
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 801/1241
Process Properties Continued
Provide inputs to workflow steps
Receive outputs from workflow steps
Can be used as inputs for following steps
FirstNameLastName
ContactCode
StringManipulation
Length
Truncate
Concatenate
String1
String
String2
String
OutputStrin
String
Businessservice step
Proce
Proper
Configuring a Siebel Workflow
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 802/1241
Configuring a Siebel Workflow
1. Create a New Workflow Process
2. Specify the Process Properties
3. Add Workflow Steps
4. Configure the Steps
5. Validate the Workflow Process
1 Create a New Workflow Process
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 803/1241
1. Create a New Workflow Process
In Siebel Tools, select the Workflow Process object ty
Create a new workflow process definition
Enter the process name
Assign the process to a locked project Assign a business object
Provides context for references to business components
Right-click and select Edit Workflow Process to invok
Workflow Designer
2 Specify the Process Properties
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 804/1241
2. Specify the Process Properties
Select the Process Properties tab in the Multi Value P
Window (MVPW) to display the default process prope
Edit the default set of process properties
Add new process properties to store additional values used by the workflow steps
Leave the default process properties as is
Default process properties
for all workflows
3 Add Workflow Steps
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 805/1241
3. Add Workflow Steps
Add a start and end step to the designer
Drag steps from the palette to the workspace
Add other steps as required
Add connectors to sequence the steps Make sure that connector ends are anchored (red box
Dynamic connectors (are drawn automawith right angles as necessary)
Connector anchored
4 Configure the Steps (Siebel Operation)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 806/1241
4. Configure the Steps (Siebel Operation)
For each Siebel operation step
Specify the business component and operation
Use the properties window
Specify additional child arguments as required in the M Field names
Search spec input arguments
Output arguments
Business
component
Operation
Fields retrieved
4 Configure the Steps (Business Service)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 807/1241
4. Configure the Steps (Business Service)
For each business service step
Specify the business service name and business servic
Use the Properties window
Business serviceand method
4 Configure the Steps (Business Service) Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 808/1241
4. Configure the Steps (Business Service)
For each business service step
Specify inputs to use in the workflow
Select the Input Arguments tab in the MVPW
Assign a literal value or a process property to each input Specify outputs of the business service step
Select the Output arguments tab in the MVPW
Assign each output to a process property
Input arguments
defined for method
Constant value
assigned as input
Value of p
assign
Value of output argument
assigned to process property
4. Configure the Steps (Decision Point Step) Contin
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 809/1241
4. Configure the Steps (Decision Point Step)
For each decision point step, set conditions on each b
(connector) originating at the step
Select connector
Right-click and select Edit Conditions
4. Configure the Steps (Decision Point Step)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 810/1241
4. Configure the Steps (Decision Point Step)
Enter the condition criteria for each branch in the Com
Condition Criteria dialog box
Do not create a condition criteria for the default branc
Execution path taken if no other branches are satisfied
Does contact have
a middle name
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 811/1241
Additional Workflow Steps
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 812/1241
Additional Workflow Steps
Siebel workflows may contain additional types of step
Sub process
Invokes another workflow process as a sub process
User interact Navigates the user a view and waits for user activity
Wait
Pauses the workflow for a specified period of time before
Stop
Stops the workflow process instance if a predefined exce
Task
Invokes a Siebel task (subject of a subsequent module)
Workflow Modes
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 813/1241
Workflows are characterized by modes that describe runtime behavior
Service Flow
Executes a discrete set of steps and completes
Is the default mode for a new workflow Cannot include wait or user interact steps
Interactive flow
Designed to navigate users through a set of views
Is being replaced by Siebel tasks
Long running flow
Is a workflow that is intended to persist for some indetermof time
Can be paused and resumed as an inbox item
Cannot include a wait step
7.0 flows
Provided for backward compatibility of workflows defined
Siebel 7.5 release Should not be used for any new workflows
Module Highlights
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 814/1241
g g
A workflow process is an ordered set of steps execute
response to a defined set of conditions
Is used to automate parts of a business processes in a
application
Siebel workflow processes consist of different types o
(Business service, Siebel operation, decision point, et
Process properties are variables that store inputs use
outputs produced by workflow steps
Build a workflow process by:
Creating a new workflow process
Specifying the process properties
Adding workflow steps
Configuring each step
Validating the workflow process
Lab
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 815/1241
In the lab you will:
Configure a workflow process that includes business se
Configure a workflow process that includes a decision
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 816/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 817/1241
3
Module 36: Testing and Deploying
Workflow Processes
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
Module Objectives
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 818/1241
j
After completing this module you should be able to:
Test a Siebel workflow process using the simulator
Deploy a Siebel workflow process
Why you need to know:
Workflow processes should be tested to verify that they
desired prior to deployment
Deployment is a critical step in making a new workflow
available for use
Managing Siebel Workflow Processes
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 819/1241
Workflow process differ from most other object definit
Are not compiled into an .srf file
Cannot be archived into .sif files
Can be exported to and imported from XML files
After a workflow process has been configured in Sieb
Simulate the workflow
Deploy the workflow
Workflow Simulator
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 820/1241
Use the workflow simulator to verify that the workflow
as desired
Workflow simulation is controlled in Siebel Tools
Workflow is actually executed in an instance of a Siebe
Tools and the Siebel client must be connected to a comm
DB
Enabling Workflow Simulation
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 821/1241
Configure the connection to the Siebel run-time instan
In Siebel Tools, select View > Options > Debug
Simulator shares the connection parameters used by Too
Specify the run-time Siebel instance
Provide a valid login
Executable: Location of siebel.exe
file for the Mobile Web Client
Arguments: Use default, opens
communication between Tools and
Mobile Web Client
CFG file: Location of the Mobile
Web Client configuration file
Working directory: The Mobile
Web Client directory
Login information: Login name,password, data source
Test a Workflow Using the Workflow Simulator
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 822/1241
1. Specify the Test Record
2. Start the Simulator
3. Start the Simulation
4. Execute the Workflow
1. Specify the Test Records
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 823/1241
In the Siebel client, create test records to support the
Use About Record to determine the row ID
In Siebel Tools, enter the row ID of the test record as
string for the Object ID process property When the workflow is invoked in production, row ID of
passed in as an input argument
2. Start the Simulator
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 824/1241
Make sure that all instances of the Siebel client applic
closed
Right-click the Workflow Designer workspace and sel
Simulate
Workflow Designer displays the workflow in the simulat
3. Start the Simulation
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 825/1241
Click the Start Simulation button in the simulation tool
Use View > Toolbars > Simulation to display the simula
A new instance of the Siebel client is launched
Wait until Siebel client
application starts and displays
the Workflow Simulator view
Start simulation
4. Execute the Workflow
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 826/1241
Execute the workflow in either
Single step mode using the Simulate Next button
Continuous mode using the Complete Simulation butto
Verify that the workflow branches correctly at decisionSimulate next Complete Simulation
4. Execute the Workflow Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 827/1241
Inspect the watch window to verify that process prope
the expected values
Values of user added process properties can be edited
simulation
Inspect process properties
in watch window
4. Execute the Workflow Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 828/1241
Complete the simulation
Use either Simulate Next or Complete Simulation butto
Verify that the final values of process properties are c
Click the Stop Simulation button Inspect the client and verify that the desired changes
Stop simulation
Workflow Simulator Considerations
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 829/1241
Cannot simulate workflow processes that invoke serv
components
Must test these workflows directly on the Siebel Web C
Cannot simulate workflows with run-time events on st
(discussed in a subsequent module)
Can simulate workflows with user interact steps
Requires the developer to perform the activity in the cli
application to allow the simulation to proceed
Managing Siebel Workflow Processes
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 830/1241
After a workflow process has been configured in Sieb
Simulate the workflow
Deploy the workflow
Deploying Workflow Processes
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 831/1241
Transfers the workflow from the repository to run-time
make it available for use
Consists of:
Developer setting the workflow complete in Siebel Too
Administrator activating the workflow in the run-time cli
Publish the Workflow
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 832/1241
In Siebel Tools, click the Publish button in the Workflo
Sets the status to Completed
Prevents any further editing of the workflow process
Makes the workflow available for activation
Publish
Checking in the Workflow Process
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 833/1241
In Siebel Tools, check in the completed workflow proc
server repository
Siebel Web Client can now access the workflow
Activating the Workflow
I th Si b l W b Cli t ti t th kfl
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 834/1241
In the Siebel Web Client, activate the workflow
Navigate to Business Process - Administration > Workf
Deployment
Select the newly deployed workflow and click Activate
Transfers the workflow definitions in the repository tables
corresponding run-time tables
Publishing/Activating a Workflow Process
D l d l d ti t kfl
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 835/1241
Developers can deploy and activate a workflow proce
Siebel Tools to expedite testing of the deployed workf
In Siebel Tools, click the Publish/Activate button in the
toolbar
Sets the status to Completed
Transfers the workflow definitions in the repository tabl
corresponding run-time tables
Siebel client (for testing) must use the same database as
Publish/Activate
Workflow Monitoring
N i t t B i P Ad i i t ti > W
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 836/1241
Navigate to Business Process - Administration > Wor
Deployment
Select the active workflow process
Set the monitoring level in the active workflow process
The value assigned is used whenever the workflow proce
or resumed
Monitoring Level
Monitoring le els can be set as follo s to record diffe
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 837/1241
Monitoring levels can be set as follows to record diffe
degrees of detail
Performance can degrade as level of detail recorded in
* In Detail, data is written at the end of the workflow
** In Debug mode, data is written to disk after every step
All Steps All Steps
All Steps
None
None
Record StepInstance
YY
Y
Y
N
RecordProcess
Instance
All Steps All steps
None
None
None
Record ProcessProperties
4-Debug**3-Detail*
2-Progress
1-Status
0-None
Levels
Deployment Considerations
Deploy all child workflows (sub processes) first to ma
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 838/1241
Deploy all child workflows (sub processes) first to ma
available to the deployed workflow
Compile any new repository objects referenced in the
workflow such as business components, fields, and v
Revising Workflows
Workflows are versioned
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 839/1241
Workflows are versioned
Existing versions are kept and a new version is created
To revise a workflow
In Siebel Tools, select the desired workflow (check out
Click the Revise button in the Workflow toolbar
Creates a copy of the workflow
Increments the version number
Sets status to In Progress
Edit and test the workflow
Deploy the workflowRevise
Administering a Revised Workflow
In the Siebel Web Client activate the workflow as bef
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 840/1241
In the Siebel Web Client, activate the workflow as bef
Sets the deployment status of the prior version to Outd
After being activated the new version will be invoked
Any instances of the prior workflow version running at t
activation run to completion
Module Highlights
Use the workflow simulator to verify that the workflow
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 841/1241
Use the workflow simulator to verify that the workflow
as designed
Workflow simulation is controlled in Siebel Tools
Workflow is executed in an instance of a Siebel client
Deploy a workflow to make it available for use in the r
client
In Siebel Tools, publish the workflow
In the run-time client, activate the workflow to make the
available for invocation
Revise a deployed workflow to edit it
This creates a new version
Lab
In the lab you will:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 842/1241
In the lab you will:
Simulate workflows you previously configured
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 843/1241
3
Module 37: Executing Workflow
Processes
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 844/1241
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe the workflow execution architecture
List several ways to invoke workflow
Invoke a workflow process using a run-time event
Invoke a workflow process using a custom control
Why you need to know:
There are multiple ways to invoke a workflow process a
need to understand the choices available
Executing Workflow Processes
Workflow processes are executed either in
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 845/1241
Workflow processes are executed either in
The user’s application object manager
Supports synchronous processing
A separate server component known as the Workflow
Manager component Supports asynchronous processing
In both cases workflow processes are executed using
Workflow Process Manager business service
Is often referred to as the Workflow Engine
Synchronous Workflow Processing
Is typically executed in the user’s application object m
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 846/1241
Is typically executed in the user s application object m
User is forced to wait until the workflow completes (or p
Hourglass icon appears
Can be triggered by an action on the part of the user:
Directly by clicking a button or menu item
Indirectly by performing a record or applet operation
Is used to execute specific business logic that:
Is triggered by the user’s activity
Should be completed before the user continues activity
Asynchronous Workflow Processing
Is executed in the Workflow Process Manager server
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 847/1241
g
component
User (if any) is not prevented from continuing activity
Is typically triggered by a change in the value of some
a database table
Can respond to changes not associated with user activ
For example: updates resulting from Enterprise Integratio
imports
Can respond to conditions that exist for some threshold
time Is used to execute specific business logic when a spe
condition is satisfied
Will be discussed in the following module
Invoking Workflow Processes
A workflow process can be invoked by a variety of me
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 848/1241
p y y
Run-time events
Custom buttons and menu items
Workflow policies
Programmatically (that is as part of script)
This module
Next module
Beyond scop
Run-Time Events
Are a mechanism that allows customer-configured pro
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 849/1241
g p
be triggered by user activity
Consist of:
A specification of some user activity such as:
Record being updated
Navigating to/from an applet
The resultant processing
Workflow
One or more calls to business services
Known as an action set
Run-Time Events Continued
Can be defined for three types of objects:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 850/1241
yp j
Application
Examples: logging in, logging out
Applet
Examples: displaying an applet, displaying a record
Business component
Examples: Querying, deleting a record, setting a field valu
Are fired when a user performs the corresponding act
Business Component Events Business component events often come in pairs such
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 851/1241
PreDelete/Delete
PreSetField/SetField
PreWriteRecord/WriteRecord
The Pre- event is fired immediately prior to object ma
executing the operation
Example: PreWriteRecord executes customer process
the record is saved
Allows for possible verification of field values
The other event is fired immediately after the object mexecutes the action
Example: WriteRecord executes customer processing
record is written
Allows for follow-on processing after a record is saved
Adding a Run-Time Event to a Workflow Process A run-time event can be added to a workflow process
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 852/1241
condition on the connector out of a:
Start step
Used to invoke the workflow
Wait step Used to resume the workflow
User interact step
Used to resume the workflow
Add run-time
event here
Add run-time
event here
Invoking a Workflow Using a Run-Time Event
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 853/1241
1. Add the Run-Time Event
2. Deploy and Activate the Workflow
3. Reload the Run-Time Events
1. Add the Run-Time Event Create the workflow process as usual
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 854/1241
Select the connector to attach a run-time event
Must be a start, wait, or user interact step
In the properties window, specify the triggering event
Caution: A workflow with a run-time event on the start
cannot be tested with the workflow simulator
Select
connector
Specify the event type,
business component,
and event to monitor
2. Deploy and Activate the Workflow In Siebel Tools, deploy the event
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 855/1241
In the Siebel client, activate the event
2. Deploy and Activate the WorkflowContinued
Activating the event automatically registers the run-tim
d i t d kfl ith th Si b l ti
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 856/1241
and associated workflow with the Siebel run-time eve
Creates an action set that invokes the Workflow Proces
Row ID of activated
workflow Business Service,
method to invoke
3. Reload the Run-Time Events Navigate to Administration - Runtime Events > Events
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 857/1241
Select Menu > Reload Runtime Events
Updates the run-time event engine with the new run-tim
Not necessary to query for the specific run-time event
Run-time event created by
activating the workflow process
Invoking Workflows Using a Custom Control
User explicitly clicks a custom button or menu item to
kfl
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 858/1241
workflow
Configuration involves applet user properties
Custom menu item that
invokes a workflow
Invoking a Workflow Using a Custom Menu Item
Create a command object
S if l f h M h d
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 859/1241
Specify a value for the Method property
Add an applet method menu item to reference the com
Invoking a Workflow Using a Custom Menu Item
Add a new Applet User property that associates the w
be invoked with the new named method
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 860/1241
be invoked with the new named method
Invoke this business
service and method and …
… pass in these pairs
argument names and v
Invoking a Workflow Using a Custom Button
Create a custom control for the button
S if l f th M th d I k d t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 861/1241
Specify a value for the Method Invoked property
Add a new Applet User property that associates the w
be invoked with the new named method
Create an applet user property specifying the workflow
to execute when the named method is invoked
Specify a
defined nam
Method to
on the co
Invoking a Workflow Process Explicitly
The Workflow Process Manager business service can
referenced explicitly:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 862/1241
referenced explicitly:
In a script
As parameters in declarative configuration
Developers must specify: The name of the business service and method
The name of the workflow process and other paramete
arguments
Often the RowId parameter must be passed in
Invoking a Workflow Process Explicitly Continued
A workflow process can also be executed using the b
service simulator
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 863/1241
service simulator
Is an alternative way of testing new workflows
Business service that
executes workflow processes
Provide name of workflo
process as input argume
Module Highlights
Workflow processes are executed in the Workflow Pro
manager in either the application object manager or in
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 864/1241
manager in either the application object manager or in
component
Can be executed either synchronously or asynchronou
A workflow process can be invoked by a variety of me Run-time events
Custom buttons and menu items
Workflow policies
Run-time events are a mechanism that allows custom
configured processing to be triggered by user activity
Lab
In the lab you will:
Invoke a workflow from a custom menu item
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 865/1241
Invoke a workflow from a custom menu item
Invoke a workflow using a run-time event
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 866/1241
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 867/1241
3
Module 38: Using Workflow Policies
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Create a workflow policy that invokes a workflow proce
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 868/1241
Create a workflow policy that invokes a workflow proce
Workflow Process Manager server component
Enable the workflow policy using workflow server comp
Why you need to know:
Some workflow processes are best executed asynchro
the Siebel server
Asynchronous Workflow Processing
Some workflows need to be executed asynchronously
They might run for a long time and should not execute
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 869/1241
They might run for a long time and should not execute
object manager
They might need to wait for the invoking condition to be
for some period of time Example: If a critical service request remains unassigned
than two hours, notify the service manager and set the pr
Workflow policies are a mechanism for asynchronous
of workflow processes
Workflow Policies
A workflow policy is a rule consisting of:
One of more policy conditions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 870/1241
One of more policy conditions
A policy action
Action is invoked when all conditions are true
Example: When a service request priority = Critical ANsubstatus = Unassigned:
Send urgent message to service manager
Conditions:
Substatus = Unassigned
Service Request Priority = Critical
Conditions:
Substatus = Unassigned
Service Request Priority = Critical
Actions:
Update priority to High
Send message to service
Actions:
Update priority to High
Send message to service
IF True… then execute
Workflow
Policy
Workflow
Policy
Workflow Policy Conditions
Policy condition specifies a logical relationship betwee
workflow policy column and a value
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 871/1241
p y
All policy conditions must be satisfied for a condition t
Policy may have a duration specified
Conditions must apply for the duration before the actionexecuted
Conditions:
Status = Open
Service Request Priority = High
Conditions:
Status = Open
Service Request Priority = High
Actions:
Update priority to Very H
Send message to owner
Actions:
Update priority to Very H
Send message to owner
IF True for at least two hours … then execute
Workflow
PolicyDuration = 2 hours
Workflow
PolicyDuration = 2 hours
Workflow Policy Actions
A workflow policy action is the response to be execute
Consists of:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 872/1241
Consists of:
Type of program to be executed
Examples: Run workflow process, send email, send mess
broadcast One or more program-specific arguments
Multiple types of programs are supported
Not restricted to running workflow processes
Actions are defined separately
Can be used in multiple workflow policies
Workflow Policies
Leverage:
A separate server component known as the Workflow
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 873/1241
p p
Manager component
Is a server component optimized for executing workflows
Behaves like an object manager
Can access the business and data layers
Does not have a user interface for direct user interaction
Database triggers:
A trigger is a process or a stored procedure attached to a
table that fires when a specified data modification event o
Are created by the Generate Triggers server component
Executing Workflow Policies
Generate Triggers creates the database triggers requ
monitor conditions in policies
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 874/1241
Workflow Monitor Agent checks for fired triggers
Identifies policy conditions that are satisfied
Invokes the desired workflow process
Workflow Process Manager executes the workflow pr
Execution is asynchronous
Work
Monitor
Server
Request Broker
Workflow
Process Mgr
Siebel
Database
Generate Triggers
S_EEnd-user activity or server process
EIM
Create triggers corresponding
to policy conditions Triggers fire when
conditions satisfied
and inserts recordRe
exExecutes the workflow
process specified in action
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 875/1241
Prerequisite for Executing Workflow Policies
Enable the Workflow Management component group
enterprise
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 876/1241
Assign and enable the component group on a server
Navigate to Administration - Server Configuration > En
Component Groups
Workflow Component Definitions
Workflow Component Group consists of six server co
definitions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 877/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 878/1241
1. Create a Workflow Group
Navigate to Administration - Business Process > Polic
Create a new policy group
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 879/1241
2. Create a Workflow Policy Action
Navigate to Administration - Business Process > Actio
Create a new action
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 880/1241
Specify Run Workflow Process
Provide workflow process as an argument
Specify the Run WorkflowProcess program
Specify the workflow
process to invoke
3. Create a Workflow Policy
Navigate to Administration - Business Process > Polic
Create a new policy
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 881/1241
Specify conditions
Add one or more actions
Associate an action to inv
the workflow process
Create a policy
Create a condition
3. Set Duration
Set duration for the workflow policy
All conditions must be met and the policy duration mus
satisfied to trigger the workflow policy actions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 882/1241
satisfied to trigger the workflow policy actions
Defaults to 0
The workflow policy actions are triggered as soon as the conditions are met
4. Generate Database Triggers
Run a Generate Triggers batch job to create database
corresponding to the policy conditions
Wh t i fi i t P li C diti
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 883/1241
When a trigger fires against a Policy Condition, a recor
in the Escalation Request Table (S_ESCL_REQ)
S_ESCL_REQ contains all the rows in the database thtrigger a policy to take action
Generate Database
Triggers
Record is inserted,
updated, or deletedS_ESCL_
Table upd
4. Generate Database Triggers Continued
Navigate to Administration - Server Management > Jo
Create a new job
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 884/1241
Select Generate Triggers
Specify parameters
Submit job
Create new Job andselect Generate Triggers
Specify
parameters
Click Submit Job tostart Component Job
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 885/1241
Verify the Workflow Policy
Create a test record (or modify an existing record) tha
the policy condition
Wait for at least the policy duration
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 886/1241
Wait for at least the policy duration
Verify that the desired workflow actions are executed
Comparing Different Methods
Use different methods for different needs
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 887/1241
YesNo
(runs on Siebel Server)
Runs on
Mobile Client
Syn
(runs in
Synchronous
(runs in user session)
Asynchronous
(runs in background)
Synchronous
NoInvokes processNot UsedRuntime Event
Not Not RequiredRequiredWF Monitor
Agent
Not Not RequiredRequiredGenerate
Triggers
Workflow
Policies
Workflow
PoliciesRuntime
Events
Runtime
EventsC
C
Cu
Co
Module Highlights
A workflow policy is a rule consisting of one or more c
and a policy action to be executed when the condition
satisfied
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 888/1241
satisfied
Workflow policies implement asynchronous execution
workflow processes Workflow policies require the use of:
Generate Triggers to create the database triggers
Workflow Monitor Agent to check for fired triggers
Workflow Process Manager to execute the associated
policy
Lab
In the lab you will:
Create a workflow policy
Enable the workflow management group components
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 889/1241
Enable the workflow management group components
Test the workflow policy
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 890/1241
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 891/1241
3
Module 39: Siebel Task UI
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe the role and benefits of Siebel Task UI
Invoke and complete a task
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 892/1241
Invoke and complete a task
Why you need to know: Siebel Task UI provides an alternate style of user intera
assists successful completion of business tasks and inc
automation of activities
Business Challenge
Many tasks require users to perform several steps to c
the task
Users may not be familiar with the sequence of steps
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 893/1241
y q p
Users may inadvertently skip a step
Users often require additional training to complete the t
Companies would like to implement a user interaction
assists users in completing such tasks
Business Solution: Siebel Task UI
Uses a wizard-like interface to guide users through ste
task
Consists of a sequenced set of views, each of which co
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 894/1241
small set of relevant data from the user
Extends business process automation to the UI layer
Users are directed to complete some steps in a task in
prescribed order
Features of Siebel Task UI
Supports forward and backward navigation through a
of views
Allows for a set of records to be reviewed and corrected
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 895/1241
completion of the task
Supports branching based on user input
Supports pausing and resuming tasks if users are inte
Instance of the partially completed task is saved in the u
Context and all data are maintained
Task is resumed from the Universal Inbox
Supports transfer of paused tasks to other users
Using Task UI
Click the Task button to expose the Task pane
Displays links to tasks that can be invoked in the curren
application context
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 896/1241
Task button
Task link
Task
pane
Task group
(a collection
of related
tasks)
Invoking a Task
Click the link for the desired task
A task view replaces the standard Siebel view
Task pane displays other views in the task to provide co
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 897/1241
the overall task
Views may be grouped into chapters
Enter data in fields in the first view
Click Next to proceed to subsequent views
Enter dataTask pane shows current
position in task
Click
to pro
Invoking a Task Continued
Task views are typically characterized by:
Small number of fields in each applet in the view
Each view focuses the user on a specific set of data to edi
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 898/1241
A set of navigation buttons located above and/or below
Known as a Playbar applet
Absence of navigation options such as view tabs and h
Click
to pr
Playbar applet
Small number ofrelated fields
Task view
Progressing Through a Task
Enter data in each subsequent view
Click Next to proceed
Click Back to return to a previous view to inspect or m
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 899/1241
p p
previously entered data
Task views in chapter
are listed as user
navigates to the view
Branching in a Task
Tasks can branch based on data the user inputs
Example: branching based on lead quality of an opportu
Some views may explicitly present to the user a choic
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 900/1241
the next step to be executed
Select the desired activity and click Next
User makes a selection
Pausing a Task
Click Pause to suspend task activity
All data and context is retained
A link to the paused task is added to the user’s inbox
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 901/1241
Navigating outside the task view implicitly pauses a ta
For example clicking a screen tab or the site map butto
Inbox
Resuming a Task
Click the link in the Inbox to resume the task
Task resumes exactly where it was paused
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 902/1241
Inbox
Task view
reappears
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 903/1241
Persistent Data in Task UI
All data entered during a task is initially stored in temp
storage managed by the Object Manager
Is not automatically written to the database as user proc
next view
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 904/1241
next view
Persistent data is committed to the database:
When the task completes
At intermediate points in the task flow if the underlying t
contains explicit commit steps
Records can not be rolled back after being committed
Data created or modified is not available to others unt
committed
Data in temporary storage:
Is maintained while the task is paused
Is cleared only when the task is cancelled or completed
Transient Data in Task UI
Refers to data collected and used during the execution
but not saved afterwards
Example: user choice about the next step
T i t d t b d t i t t d t i
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 905/1241
Transient data may be mapped to persistent data in a
in the task
User enters name of a contact to retrieve
If no contact is found, a new contact record is created a
Transient data disappears when the task ends
User’s selection does not
need to be stored persistently
Tas
Tasks and Workflow Processes
A workflow process can invoke a task
Invokes a task step in the workflow process
A task can invoke a workflow process
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 906/1241
Invokes Workflow Process Manager business service in
Invokes a workflow using event handlers associated wit
button
Tasks and Long-Running Workflow Processes
Initial task can start a long-running workflow upon com
Long-running workflow can assign a task to a user’s in
then go to sleep
U i k th i d t k f th i b d
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 907/1241
User can invoke the assigned task from the inbox and
completion will wake up the long-running workflow
Workflow (Business Process )
Views of Expense Report Approver Views of Expense Report Submitter
CreateExpense
Create Expense Report Task
View End
HomePage
SubmitExpense
Check Limit
(Bus Service )
Approval
Needed? Yes
View
HomePage
StartWorkflow
Task
StepEnd
No
InboxView
Create/Assign
Task
Approve Expense Report Task
View End
Inbox- Task: Approve
Expense Report
- Task: Approve
Transfer
ApproveExpense
InboxView
ResumeWorkflow
LaunchTask
Launch
Task
Process
Expense Report
Task to create an
expense reportT
an
Workflow initiated
by first task
Workflow m
for second
Comparison of Task UI and the Standard UI
Consider using Task UI for tasks that:
Are inherently complex
Lengthy, complex sets of inputs, lots of branching
Are performed by novice or infrequent users
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 908/1241
Are performed by novice or infrequent users
Can take advantage of the the ability to pause and tran
Involve transactional processing
Might be integrated with workflows
Consider using the standard UI for tasks that:
Are simpler
Are performed frequently by power users
Do not involve transactional processing
Module Highlights
Siebel Task UI is a wizard-like interface that guides us
through steps in a task
Invoke a task from a link in the task pane
Use the buttons in the Playbar applet to proceed retu
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 909/1241
Use the buttons in the Playbar applet to proceed, retu
previous view, pause, or complete the task
Paused tasks are resumed from the user’s inbox
Data collected during a task is not committed to the da
Until the task is completed
Or is explicitly committed at specific points in the task
Lab
In the lab you will:
Execute a task
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 910/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 911/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Identify the major components of a task
Configure a task
Administer a task
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 912/1241
Administer a task
Why you need to know:
These are the steps to create and deploy a task
Creating a Task
Consists of the following activities:
Configuring several types of Task UI components in Si
Deploying the task to the run-time client
Administering the task in the run-time client
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 913/1241
Administering the task in the run-time client
Components of a Task
Task Flow
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 914/1241
Task View
Task Group
Task Flow
Specifies the flow of a task as a sequence of task ste
Examples: Siebel operation, business service, and so o
Includes one or more task view steps that display a vi
user
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 915/1241
user
Is configured in Siebel Tools using the Task Flow Des
Is a visual, declarative editor similar to the workflow de
Task View
Is a special type of view used in a task
Displays data to a user
Allows user to enter data
Allows user to navigate using the buttons in the Playba
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 916/1241
Allows user to navigate using the buttons in the Playba
Consists of one or more applets and the Playbar appl
Is invoked in a task view step in a task flow
Task View Continued
Differs from standard views
The view is not displayed in the context of a screen
The user must use buttons in the Playbar applet to nav
Clicking any UI element outside the task view and task pa
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 917/1241
g y p
the task and displays the prior standard Siebel view
Applets in a task view do not have An applet menu
The standard record controls such as New, Delete, and Q
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 918/1241
Configuring a Task
1. Configure the Task Flow
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 919/1241
2. Create Applets for Task Views
3. Configure the Task Views
4. Bind the Task Views
5. Configure Remaining Task Steps
6. Assign Chapters
7. Create the Task Group
Configuring a Task Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 920/1241
8. Compile the Configured Objects
9. Publish the Task Flow
1. Configure the Task Flow
Use the Task Wizard to create a Task object
Select File > New Object
Select the Task Tab and click the Task icon
Enter fields as below:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 921/1241
Na
in
bu
1. Configure the Task Flow Continued
In the task Designer, add steps as required
Drag connectors and anchor them to the steps
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 922/1241
2. Create Applets for Task Views
Use the Form Applet Wizard to create applets that dis
small set of focused data
Alternatively, copy an existing applet and delete the
unnecessary fields
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 923/1241
3. Configure the Task Views
Use the Task View Wizard to create one or more task
View objects with type = Task
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 924/1241
3. Configure the Task Views Continued
Select a view Web template
Assign one or more customized applets
Add the Playbar applet to the top and/or the bottom o
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 925/1241
4. Bind the Task Views
For each task view step in the flow, assign a task view
Right-click the task step and select Bind Task View
Select the view from the list of available views
Set the button properties for the view
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 926/1241
Determines which buttons
are disabled in a view
Set to Next for all
but the final view
5. Configure Remaining Task Steps
Configure other types of steps such as:
Siebel Operation
Identify the business component and operation
Set the Defer Write property to TRUE if necessary
D i i P i t t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 927/1241
Decision Point step
Set the conditions on each branch
Prevents Object Manager from
rejecting the record because
some required business
component fields are not
populated
6. Assign Chapters
Optionally, create chapters to group steps in the task
Assign each step to a chapter
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 928/1241
Assigned to chapter 2
Assigned to chapter 1
7. Create the Task Group
Assign the task to an existing (or new) task group
Groups several tasks in the task pane
Assign the task group to a view
Assign to the Task Pane View to make the tasks visible
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 929/1241
Assign task
group to view
ap
8. Compile the Configured Objects
Compile the configured objects into the target SRF file
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 930/1241
9. Publish the Task Flow
Validate the task flow to identify any possible errors
Right-click and select Validate
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 931/1241
9. Publish the Task Flow Continued
Click the Publish button in the Deployment toolbar to task flow
Sets the task flow to complete
Makes it available for activation
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 932/1241
Administering a Task
1. Activate the Task Flow
2. Register the Task Flow
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 933/1241
2. Register the Task Flow
3. Add Responsibilities
1. Activate the Task Flow
Navigate to Administration - Business Processes > TaDeployment
Select the published task and click Activate
Makes the task available for use in the client
Alternati el p blish/acti ate directl from Siebel Too
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 934/1241
Alternatively, publish/activate directly from Siebel Too
2. Register the Task Flow
Navigate to Application - Administration > Tasks
Create a new record and select the task from the list o
published tasks
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 935/1241
3. Add Responsibilities
Add one or more responsibilities to the registered task
Allows users with the responsibility to see the task in th
Click Clear Cache to make the task immediately availa
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 936/1241
Adds task to the Siebel
Administrator responsibility
Testing the Deployment
Click the Tasks button to display the Task pane
Verify that the desired task appears
Click the task link and execute the task
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 937/1241
Module Highlights
Creating a task in Siebel Tools consists of:
Configuring a task flow
Creating and binding task view steps
Assigning steps to chapters
Adding the task to a task group
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 938/1241
g g p
Assigning the task group to a view Publishing the task to the run-time client
Administering the task in the run-time client consists o
Activating the task
Registering the task
Adding the task to one or more responsibilities
Lab
In the lab you will: Create a task
Deploy and administer the task
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 939/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 940/1241
Module 41: Transient Business
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 941/1241
4
Module 41: Transient Business
Components and Branching
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to: Describe the role of transient business components an
applets
Configure branching logic in a task
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 942/1241
Why you need to know: Transient business components allow you to incorpora
branching logic into task flows and to manage user dat
mapped immediately to a business component field
User-Entered Data
Is typically persistent Maps immediately to regular business component field
Is written to the database during or at the end of the tas
May be transient
Is entered and then referenced in a subsequent step in
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 943/1241
Is entered and then referenced in a subsequent step in
flow Does not need to be stored persistently
Transient Business Component (TBC)
Is used to represent user input and other data that doneed to persist beyond the lifetime of the task
Type is Transient
Has one or more single-value fields
Does not support joins or multi-value fields
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 944/1241
Maps to a special table: S_TU_LOG Is based on a special class: CSSBCTaskTransient
Stores one record at most
Is managed by the Object Manager
Uses for a Transient Business Component
Capture user selections that control the flow of a task Collect data that will be incorporated into persistent d
the task such as:
Postal code or telephone area code
Data that may be conditionally mapped to business com
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 945/1241
y y
fields in subsequent task steps Support applets that display data from several busine
components
Example: an applet that needs to show some quote and o
Task Applet
Is a special type of applet used to display and collect data
Maps to a transient business component
Displays data from only that business component
Can be assigned only to a task view
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 946/1241
Can appear in a view by itself or with one or more stan
Task Applet
Task Applet Continued
Differs from standard applets Is always a form applet displaying a single record
Must be based on grid Web templates
Applets do not display an applet title or applet menu
Is based on a specialized class: CSSSWEFrameTask
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 947/1241
Task applet
Branching in a Task
Task UI framework supports branching (in a task) basinput
Input can be persistent data such as the account type
Is implemented by configuring a decision point step
Follow the same procedure as in a workflow process
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 948/1241
Task flow with
branching
Dec
step f
Branching in a Task Continued
Input can also be transient data, such as the selectionuser makes when presented a choice about the next s
Requires the use of a transient business component
Is implemented by configuring a decision point step
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 949/1241
User selection is
transient data
Configuring Branching in a Task Using a TBC
1. Modify the Task Flow
2. Create a Picklist
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 950/1241
3. Create the Transient Business Component
4. Create the Task Applet
5. Create the Task View
6. Configure the Decision Point Step
7. Complete the Configuration
1. Modify the Task Flow
Add a task view step to the flow to allow the user to mchoice
Add a decision point step to evaluate the user’s choic
Add connectors to implement the desired business flo
Example of direct branching
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 951/1241
Task view to allow
user to make choice
Decision point s
to evaluate cho
A separate task view for
each user choice
Each branch
corresponds to amember in an LOV
1. Modify the Task Flow Continued
Example of iteration
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 952/1241
Decision point step
to evaluate choiceLoop that
adds a note
and then asks
user tochoose again
Each branch corresponds
to a member in an LOV
T
us
2. Create a Picklist
A picklist is required when the user is presented a set Select an existing picklist if available
Alternatively create a new picklist
Represent the choices as members of a List Of Values
Configure the PickList object
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 953/1241
3. Create the Transient Business Component
Use the Transient BusComp Wizard to create the tranbusiness component
Should use the wizard since it assigns required values
TBC properties
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 954/1241
3. Create the Transient Business Component Cont
Add one or more fields Assign name, type, and length as required
Do not assign a column
Will be assigned automatically after the record is saved
If required, assign the picklist
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 955/1241
Create the single-value field pick map
Assigned automatically
by Siebel Tools
Provides choic
user select
4. Create the Task Applet
Use the Task Applet Wizard to create the task applet Identify the transient business component
Identify the task in which the applet will be used
Select the TBC field(s) that are to be displayed
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 956/1241
4. Create the Task Applet Continued
Inspect the applet in the Web Layout Editor Wizard assigns a radio button control to all fields
For fields with a picklist, the radio button control:
Displays the members of the underlying list of values (LO
Allows users to select a value by clicking a radio button
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 957/1241
For other fields, manually change the HTML type to thvalue
Reposition and/or resize the label and control for each
Radio butto
control (disp
the member
a LOV)
Control caption,
can be edited to
include instructions
5. Create the Task View
Use the Task View Wizard to create a new task view Assign zero or more regular applets as required
Assign the task applet
Selection is restricted to task applets assigned to the task
Select and position the Playbar applet
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 958/1241
Alternatively, add the task applet to an existing task v Drag a Task Applet icon from the Applet pane to an ap
placeholder
Select the desired task applet
6. Configure the Decision Point Step
Right-click the decision point step Set the name property to a meaningful value
Right-click each connector leading from the decision p
Set the label property to a meaningful value as well
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 959/1241
6. Configure the Decision Point Step Continued
Compose the conditions for each connector Right-click each connector leading from the decision po
and select Edit Conditions
Select TBC, field, and desired value for this branch
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 960/1241
TBC
LOV
member
7. Complete the Configuration
Configure remaining steps (task views, Siebel operation)
For each task view step, bind the corresponding task
Remember to set the Forward Button Type to Next
Assign each step to a chapter
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 961/1241
Compile all new and modified objects
Test the Modified Task
Validate the task Publish and activate the task
Invoke the task in the client and verify that the task ap
appears and branches as desired
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 962/1241
Module Highlights
Tasks may include transient data Data entered by users that does not need to be stored
task completes
A transient business component is required to store d
entered by a user that is not required after the task co
A t k l t i i d t di l d t t d i t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 963/1241
A task applet is required to display data stored in a trabusiness component
A task can include branching based on user entered v
including transient data
Branching requires adding a decision point step to the
Lab
In the lab you will: Extend a task to include branching
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 964/1241
Module 42: Siebel Business Rules
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 965/1241
4
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to: Describe the Siebel Business Rules architecture
Use HaleyAuthority to examine business rules
Why you need to know:
Si b l B i R l id f l t t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 966/1241
Siebel Business Rules provides a powerful way to autobusiness decisions and logic in a Siebel application
Implementing Business Logic in Siebel Applicatio
Can often be done using declarative configuration suc Properties in business components and fields
Example: validation and post-default values
Siebel workflows
Siebel state models
O i ll i t i ti
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 967/1241
Occasionally requires custom scripting Can result in:
Business logic that is distributed throughout the applica
Difficult to understand the complete set of implemented log
Business logic that is represented in multiple ways with
syntax
Difficult to modify to meet new requirements
The need to compile and deploy a new Siebel repositor
Business Challenge
Companies want a more unified way to implement buslogic
Centralized store of business rules or logic that can be
modified to incorporate changing business processes
Reviewable by non-implementers such as business ana
Deployable without recompiling the SRF file
All d ti f b i l i t ti
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 968/1241
Allows updating of business logic at run time
Solution: Siebel Business Rules
Provides the ability for companies to create and enforcthat capture their business policies
Rules are expressed in “natural English” rather than a s
SQL statements
Rules can be specified and reviewed by business experts
Rules are centrally developed and administered
R l f d l b ll th h t th Si b l li
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 969/1241
Rules are enforced globally throughout the Siebel appli
Uses client-side configuration rather than repository-b
configuration and compilation
Allows rules to be created, updated, and deployed durin
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 970/1241
Siebel Business Rule
Is a conditional or qualified statement about business and characteristics that apply in a business environme
Is written using the rules of English grammar
if an expense has any expense item which does not have a description
invalidate the expense with "All expense items must have a description
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 971/1241
Set “Reimbursable Flag” of an expense item to false
if the expense item’s expense item type is “Personal”
unless the expense item’s description is “Pre-approved”
Qualified rule statement
Conditional rule statement
Concepts
Are nouns that represent the entities and their charact Are used to build rule statements
Correspond to business components and fields in the
data model
ConceptConcept (represents a
business component)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 972/1241
if an expense has any expense item which does not have a description
invalidate the expense with "All expense items must have a description
Concept(Field)
Rule statement
business component)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 973/1241
HaleyAuthority
Is a separate third-party application used to examine adevelop Siebel business rules
Is installed as part of a Siebel Tools installation
Is invoked from the Siebel Tools program group
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 974/1241
HaleyAuthority Continued
Imports relevant object definitions from the Siebel devrepository
Generates the corresponding Haley concepts
Is used to author the rule statements based on the ge
concepts
Stores concepts and statements in a separate databaf d t k l d b
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 975/1241
Stores concepts and statements in a separate databareferred to as a knowledge base
Deploys rules to a set of tables in the Siebel run-time
Run-Time Inference Engine
Is a third-party rules engine used to evaluate and execbusiness rules at run time
Is installed automatically in the Siebel client during a s
client installation
Is accessed by calling the Business Rules Service bus
service
S th i t f t th i f i
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 976/1241
Serves as the interface to the inference engine
Can be invoked using:
An action set in a run-time event
A business service step in a Siebel workflow or task
A business service call in a script
Exploring Rules
Use HaleyAuthority to examine rules Click the Modules & Statements tab to display rule state
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 977/1241
Structure of Rules
Rules are written using English grammar (“natural Eng A given rule can be expressed in several ways
Common practice is to create statements followed by
that determine if the statement applies
If: statement applies when at least one if qualifier is true
Unless: statement does not apply when unless qualifier
Only if: statement applies when all only if qualifiers are
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 978/1241
Only if: statement applies when all only if qualifiers are
Rule Statements
A statement can be either a: Statement of fact
Example: An expense report is a valid expense report
Statement of action
Set “Reimbursable Flag” of an expense item to false
Siebel-specific actions consist of three action types
Actions: Produce output or modify data in the Siebel ap
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 979/1241
Actions: Produce output or modify data in the Siebel ap
Set a field value, invalidate with reason
Functions: Return a value from the Siebel application
Get profile attribute, get active view name
Predicates: Return a Boolean value
User in task mode, currency is equal to
Concepts
Click the Concepts tab in HaleyAuthority to display the Entity: Describes entities (things) in the business mode
Value: Describes characteristics of entities in the busine
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 980/1241
Siebel Business
Rules uses only
these two types
of concepts
Entities
Expand Entity to display the entities Represent the business components imported from the
repository
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 981/1241
Expense and Expense Item
business components
imported for these rules
Value
Expand Value and its children types to display the valu
Represent business component fields imported from the
repository
Are grouped by the type of the field
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 982/1241
Expense and Expense Item
(text) fields imported for these
rules
Expense Item (Boolean) fields
imported for these rules
Phrasings
Consist of short expressions that capture a relationsh
concepts
Typically represent the relationship between a business
component and one of its fields or a child business com
Are used to build rule statements
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 983/1241
Capture relationship between business
component and one of its fields
Capture relationship between parent and child BCs
Concepts in Siebel Business Rules
Concepts are generated automatically using the Siebe
Importer in HaleyAuthority
Entities correspond to Siebel objects
Values correspond to single-value fields of objects
Rules developers must not modify or extend the conce
way
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 984/1241
Module Highlights
Siebel Business Rules allows users to create and enfo
that capture business policies
Rules are expressed in natural English
Rules are developed by client-side configuration
Siebel Business Rules consist of:
Authoring tool accessible from Siebel Tools
A run-time execution engine accessed by calling a busi
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 985/1241
A run time execution engine accessed by calling a busi
service
A rules module consists of multiple statements based
predefined concepts, actions, functions, and predicate
Concepts correspond to business components and field
Siebel repository
Lab
In the lab you will:
Examine an existing rule
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 986/1241
Module 43: Creating Business Rules
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 987/1241
4
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Create rules using HaleyAuthority
Deploy and administer rules in the Siebel client
Invoke rules in the Siebel client
Why you need to know:
You perform these steps to create business rules
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 988/1241
You perform these steps to create business rules
Creating Siebel Business Rules
Concepts are generated in HaleyAuthority
Are based on object definitions in the Siebel repository
Are created by invoking the Siebel Object Importer
Statements are then written based on the concepts
Rules developers must not:
Modify the underlying concepts
Create additional concepts manually
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 989/1241
Developing Rules
1. Create a New Knowledge Base
2. Import Siebel Object Definitions
3. Create a Rule Module
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 990/1241
4. Deploy the Rule Module
1. Create a New Knowledge Base
Start HaleyAuthority from the Siebel Tools program gr
Select the ODBC connection string for the new knowle
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 991/1241
1. Create a New Knowledge Base Continued
Verify that a base set of Haley concepts appears
No entities yet
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 992/1241
2. Import Siebel Object Definitions
Invoke the Siebel object importer
In HaleyAuthority, select File > Import > Siebel Object
Provide the connection information for:
Master repository data source (source of object definitio
Run-time data source (environment where rules will be
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 993/1241
Exam
configura
importin
sample re
2. Import Siebel Object Definitions Continued
On the first import for a new knowledge base the follow
occurs immediately:
Object definitions relating to currency and currency cod
imported
Concepts to support Siebel currency calculation proced
created
Siebel-specific actions, functions, and predicates are cr
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 994/1241
2. Import Siebel Object Definitions Continued
After currency-related concepts are created:
Select Import Siebel Objects
Specify the Siebel Business Object
Select the business component and, possibly, child bus
components
For each selected business component, select one or m
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 995/1241
Business
and field
the expen
discus
previo
2. Inspect Concepts
Inspect the output window to verify that corresponding
concepts, and phrasings were created
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 996/1241
2. Inspect Concepts Continued
In the Concepts tab, expand entity and value
Verify that the entities and values corresponding to the
and fields have been created
Inspect the phrasings
Should be of the form “a <BusComp> has a <Field>” an
equivalents
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 997/1241
2. Import Siebel Object Definitions Continued
Additional import considerations
Entities are used to represent business components
Parent and child business components that are selected e
Business components that are referenced in multi-value fi
Values are used to represent single-
value fields
Are categorized by the field type Example:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 998/1241
DTYPE_TEXT value: string
DTYPE_PHONE value: string
DTYPE_INTEGER value: number
Several Siebel field types cannot be
converted
Are not displayed in the list of
selectable fields
3. Create a Rule Module
A module is a collection of rule statements that are de
together
Suggestion:
Create a rule module to contain only the statements that n
evaluated as a set by the rules engine
Name the rule module to indicate how the module will be i
A module can be divided into submodules to improve
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 999/1241
3. Create a Rule Module Continued
Click the Modules & Statement tab
Add a new module (and submodules if desired)
Module
Submodules
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1000/1241
3. Create a Rule Module Continued
Add one or more statements
Use the Edit Statement dialog box to enter the stateme
Text is bolded if it can be parsed, that is if the words enter
correspond to defined concepts and phrases
A list of eligible words is presented at all times
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1001/1241
Enter text
Allowable
words based
on phrasings
3. Create a Rule Module Continued
Add applicability conditions to specify when the statem
Edit statements until all content parses
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1002/1241
Right-click
Applicability toselect condition
4. Deploy the Rule Module
Invoke the Siebel Deployer
In HaleyAuthority select Tools > Siebel Deployment
Verify the connection parameters for the run-time data s
Select the modules to deploy and click OK
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1003/1241
Administer Deployed Rules
In the Siebel client, navigate to Administration - Busin
> Rule Modules List
Select the deployed rule module
Specify the business object that will provide data to th
rules engine
Should be the business object specified for object impo
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1004/1241
Administer Deployed Rules Continued
Create one or more Rule Module Relation records
They identify the business components necessary to ev
rules
Click New and select the records that specify the pare
relationships captured in the rules
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1005/1241
Activate Rules
Click the Activate button in the Rule Modules list apple
the status to active
Only active rules are evaluated by the rules engine
Status changes
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1006/1241
to Active
Invoking the Rules Engine
The rules engine is accessed by calling the Business
Service business service Can be invoked using an action set for a run-time event
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1007/1241
Creating a Run-Time Event Action Set
In the Siebel client, navigate to Administration - Runtim
> Action Sets
Create a new action set, and a child action of BusServ
Action set
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1008/1241
Action set
Action for the action set
Creating a Run-Time Event Action Set Continued
In the More Info applet
Specify Business Rule Service and RunRules as the bu
service name and method
Specify the rule module name as the context
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1009/1241
Creating a Run-Time Event Action Set Continued
Navigate to Administration - Runtime Events > Events
Create an event record for the business component
Specify the desired run-time event
Assign the action set
Select Reload Runtime Events from the applet menu
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1010/1241
Action set Run-time event
Test the Rule Module
Create a record and trigger the run-time event
Verify that the desired business logic is executed
Create additional records as required to fully test the r
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1011/1241
Additional Ways to Invoke the Rules Engine
The business rules service can be invoked:
In custom scripts
In business service steps in Siebel workflows and tasks
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1012/1241
Invokes rules
engine to determine
the lead quality
Module Highlights
Create rules by:
Creating concepts by importing business components afrom the Siebel repository
Building statements based on the concepts
Deploy the rules module to the Siebel run-time client
Activate the rules in the client
Invoke the rules by using a run-time event Configure an action set
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1013/1241
g
Lab
In the lab you will:
Create a new rule
Import a set of Siebel objects
Create the rule module
Deploy and administer the module
Create an action set triggered by a run-time event
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1014/1241
4
Module 44: Introducing Siebel
Assignment Manager
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1015/1241
4
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Explain the role of Siebel Assignment Manager
List the elements used to create rules that assign busin
Why you need to know:
Your company may have rules and policies about how
data that can be automated using Siebel Assignment M
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1016/1241
Business Challenge
Companies need to assign business data in a timely f
in a way that consistently follows their business rules policies
Sales leads
Contacts
Accounts
Service requests
Typical characteristics
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1017/1241
Large volumes of data
Short response times
Multiple rules and policies
Complex Conflicting
Business Solution: Siebel Assignment Manager
Allows companies to automatically assign business d
most appropriate positions, people, and organizations Consists of:
Administrative functionality to define assignment rules
Server components to automatically assign business d
according to the rules
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1018/1241
Assignment Rules
Assignment Manager uses assignment rules to assign
Rules assign one or more candidates to assignment obon one or more criteria
EmployeesPositions
Organizatio
Accounts
CampaignsService Requests
Product Defects
Assignment Objects
C
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1019/1241
Organizatio
Skills
ExpertiseAvailability
Product
Workload
Sales Territory
Product Defects
Opportunities
Activities
Criteria
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1020/1241
Assignment Candidates
Candidates are instances of entities to which data can
assigned Position
Employee
Organization
Examples of candidates for pre-configured objects:
Accounts can be assigned to both positions and organ
Activities can be assigned to employees
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1021/1241
Service Requests can be assigned to both employees
organizations
Types of candidates must be consistent with the allow
control mechanisms for the object
Assignment Criteria
Criteria express conditions that must be satisfied for d
assigned Are expressed in terms of attributes of objects and/or c
Examples:
Account State = CA
Account Product = a product that candidate has expertise
Rules often include multiple criteria
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1022/1241
Administering Assignment Rules
Rules are created and administered using the Siebel
Are not part of the Siebel repository
Are not compiled into the .srf file
Can be deployed during run time
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1023/1241
Examples of Assignment Rules
Assign Accounts by Sales Region
Assign Service Requests to Skilled Agents
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1024/1241
Assign Accounts by Sales Region
ABC Company assigns accounts to its sales organiza
ABC Company also assigns accounts to its sales repsregion
Opportunities in the Western Region (CA, OR, WA) are
to Sales Rep – West
Opportunities in the Eastern Region (CT, MA, ME, NH,
assigned to Sales Rep – East
ABC Sales Organization
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1025/1241
VP Sales - US
Pat
Sales Rep – West
Alex
Sales Rep – East
Jane
ABC Sales Organization
Rule to Assign Accounts by Sales Region
Rule includes
Candidates (desired organization and positions)
Criteria for determining region to assign the account
Object: Account
Candidates: Sales Rep – East
Sales Organization
Rule: Assign East Accounts
Position candidate
Organization candidate
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1026/1241
Criteria: Account State is one of
CT,MA,ME,NH,RI,VT
Rule applies when
Rule to Assign Accounts by Sales Region Continued
A separate rule is required for each sales region
Object: Account
Criteria Acco nt State is o
Candidates:
Sales Rep – East
Sales Organization
Rule: Assign East Acco
Object: Account
Criteria Acco nt State is one of
Candidates:
Sales Rep – West
Sales Organization
Rule: Assign West Accounts
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1027/1241
Criteria: Account State is o
CT,MA,ME,NH,RI,VT
Criteria: Account State is one of
CA,OR,WA
This rule applies when This rule applies when
Candidates for Rules
Two assignment rule records are created
Candidates are listed in the Position Candidates view
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1028/1241
Criteria for Rules
Applicable states are listed in the Criteria view
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1029/1241
Assign Service Request to Skilled Agents
VP Service
XYZ company assigns service requests to employees
correct skills to resolve them Skills are properties that reflect the candidate’s abilities
areas such as:
Product expertise
Installation and upgrade skills
LanguagesService Organization
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1030/1241
Chris
(no skill)
Service Agent 1
Craig
(Network)
Service Agent 2
Ellen
(CPUs)
Service Ag
Jack
(Power sup
Assign Service Request to Skilled Agents Continued
Rule includes
Criteria for assigning request Employee skill matches the area of the service request
Candidates to be considered
Can list select employees or consider all available employ
Object: Service Request
Candidates:
Rule: Assign Service Request
Employee candidates
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1031/1241
Criteria: Candidate’s product skill =
product associated with Service
Request
All service agentsEmployee candidates
Rule applies when
Running Assignment Manager
Assignment Manager can be invoked in three modes
Batch Assignment: Can be used to submit batches of dtime assignment or reassignment
Dynamic Assignment: Automatically invokes Assignme
to assign data in near real time as records are created
Interactive Assignment: Can be used to manually assig
candidates in real time
Enabled for Service Request and Activity assignment obj
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1032/1241
Module Highlights
Siebel Assignment Manager allows companies to auto
assign business data to the most appropriate positionand organizations
Assignment rules are used to assign candidates to ob
Include assignment objects, candidates, and criteria
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1033/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1034/1241
4
Module 45: Creating Assignment
Rules
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1035/1241
4
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Create an assignment rule that assigns sales data to a Create an assignment rule that assigns service data to
employee
Test assignment rules
Why you need to know: Assignment Manager uses rules to assign data to cand
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1036/1241
Assignment Rules
Assign one or more candidates to assignments object
on one or more criteria Are specified using several key concepts
How to pick the assigneefrom the qualified candidates
Who to consider
as candidates
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1037/1241
Captures the criteria
aspect of the rule
Creating Assignment Rules
General process to create assignment rules:
Design the rule Create the rule record
Define the criteria
Specify the candidates
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1038/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1039/1241
1. Design the Assignment Rules
Determine the criteria to identify each sales region
Example: Sales regions are based on account state East region includes MA, VT, NH, ME, RI, CT
Determine the candidates to be assigned in each sale
Sales Rep - East
Sales Mgr - East
East (CT, MA, ME, NH, RI, VT)
PositionsRegion
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1040/1241
Sales Rep - West 1 Sales
Rep - West 2
West (CA, OR, WA)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1041/1241
3. Specify the Criteria
Drill down on the rule
In the Criteria view, create a new Rule Criterion to be assign data
Example: Only opportunities with an account state in th
region will be assigned
Specify the Comparison Method
Specify the attribute value(s) to be used in the compa
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1042/1241
Compares Account
State to the list below
4. Specify the Candidates
Navigate to the Position Candidates view
Add a new record for each position to be assigned Optionally assign organizations using the Organizatio
Candidates view
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1043/1241
Specify one or
more positions
Example: Assigning Service Data to Employees
1. Design the Assignment Rule
2. Create the Rule
3. Specify the Criteria
4. Specify the Candidates
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1044/1241
5. Associate Skills with Candidates
1. Design the Assignment Rule
Determine the criteria to assign a candidate to a servi
Matching criteria include: Skill match
Location
Availability
Workload
Determine the set of eligible candidates
Alternatively consider all available employees
Obj t S i R t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1045/1241
Object: Service Request
Criteria: Candidate’s product skill =
product associated with service
request
Candidates:
All service agents
2. Create the Rule
Navigate to Administration - Assignment > Assignmen
List Select the assignment object
Set Person Candidate Source to All People
Set Assignee Filter to One, Best Fit
Assign a rule group
C
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1046/1241
A
on
e
3. Specify the Criteria
Drill down on the rule
In the Criteria view, create a new rule criterion to be uassign data
Example: Consider employees only if they are skilled in
product associated with the SR
Specify the comparison method
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1047/1241
Qualify only employees
with product skill
4. Specify the Candidates
When considering a restricted set of candidates for as
set Person Candidate Source = From Rule Navigate to the Employee Candidates view
Add a new record for each employee to be considered
Otherwise set Person Candidate Source = All People
Do not explicitly add any employees to rule
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1048/1241
Do not add any employees
5. Associate Skills with Candidates
Navigate to Administration - User > Employees Assig
Skills Skills are employees attributes that can be used in ass
Select a skill and assign one or more values that appl
user
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1049/1241
Specific skills in the area
Areas of expertise
Overview of Key Concepts
Person Candidate Source
Comparison Method
Scoring
Assignee Filter
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1050/1241
Person Candidate Source
Determines the set of possible candidates that can be
to data by this rule
Consider only employees/positions l
explicitly as a candidate in the rule
From Rule
All People
Candidate Source
Consider every employee/position as
candidate
Action
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1051/1241
Team Name Consider the members of a team as
candidates
Implements dynamic assignment
Comparison Method
Determines how a rule is evaluated
Expressed in terms of object and candidate attributes
Checks if a person attribute matchesvalue specified in a rule
Compare to Person
Compare Object to
Person
Compare to Object
Comparison Method
Checks if a record attribute matches
value specified in rule
Checks if a record attribute matches
attribute of an employee or position
Action
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1052/1241
Checks if an organization attribute
matches a value specified in a rule
Compare to
Organization
Compare Object to
Organization
Person
Checks if record attribute matches t
attribute of an organization candidat
attribute of an employee or position
candidate
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1053/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1054/1241
Testing Assignment Rules
1. Release Assignment Rules
2. Enable Detailed Logging
3. Run a Batch Assignment
4. Examine the Assigned Records
After creating a rule, run Batch Assignment to test the
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1055/1241
5. Inspect the Assignment Log Files
1. Release Assignment Rules
In the Assignment Rules List view:
Verify that the rule has not expired
Click Release to update the list of rules used by Assign
Manager
A rule must be released again every time it is modified
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1056/1241
All rules are activeand are released
2. Enable Detailed Logging
Navigate to Administration - Server Configuration > S
Components Select Batch Assignment
Set Log Level for Object Assignment and Rules Evalua
Log levels can range from 0 to 5 in order of increasing de
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1057/1241
3. Run a Batch Assignment
Navigate to Administration - Server Management > Jo
Create a Batch Assignment job and submit the reques
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1058/1241
Specify assignment
object for this job
4. Examine the Assigned Records
Navigate to the list view for the data assigned
Inspect the records and verify that the desired assignwere made
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1059/1241
Has e
this
5. Inspect the Assignment Log Files
Navigate to the Siebel Server log directory to locate th
generated by the Batch Assignment job
Detailed log files document:
How each rule is evaluated and why it failed or passed
Whether the candidates from each passed rule qualify
How the assignees are determined from the list of qualifie
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1060/1241
Module Highlights
General process to create assignment rules:
Design the rule
Create the rule record
Define the criteria
Specify the candidates
Test assignment rules by:
Releasing the rule
Running a batch assignment
Examining the assignment records
Inspecting the assignment log files
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1061/1241
Inspecting the assignment log files
Enable an appropriate level of detailed logging
Lab
In the lab you will:
Create assignment rules
Test the rules
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1062/1241
4
Module 46: Tailoring Assignment
Manager Behavior
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1063/1241
4
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe the steps in the assignment methodology Prioritize rules using exclusive rules and rule group seq
Modify the behavior of an assignment object
Why you need to know:
Developing effective rules requires an understanding oassignments rules can be tailored
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1064/1241
Assignment Methodology
Refers to the steps followed by Assignment Manager
candidates to objects
Simplified representation (does not contain all steps)
Identify rules that apply
Identify a list of qualified candidates for the applicable r
Determine primary assignee and assign candidates
For more details, consult the Assignment Methodologin the Siebel Assignment Manager Administrative Gui
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1065/1241
Identify Rules That Apply
Assignment Manager evaluates all rules that apply to
Eliminates rules that fail the Compare to Object criteria
Example: Value of Required field determines if rule qualif
Multiple rules may survive
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1066/1241
Always: Rule qualifies if and only if State = CA, OR,or WA
Never: Rule qualifies regardless of stateWhen Available: Rule qualifies if state not specified or State = CA
Identify Qualified Candidates
For each rule that passes, Assignment Manager gene
of qualified candidates
Evaluates the candidates specified in the rule using cri
Compare to Person/Organization
Compare Object to Person/Organization
Scores each candidate
Applies the Assignee Filter
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1067/1241
Determines how to
process qualifying
candidates for the rule
Score Candidates
Scores can be defined for many parameters:
To rank the best candidate from a groCandidate
To rank criteria from the most importa
least important
Criteria
Criteria values
Assignment rule
Item Scored
To apply the score to the candidate’s
when the candidate meets the rule cr
To rank criteria values from the most
the least important
Action
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1068/1241
To rank the best candidate from a gro
qualified candidates
Candidate
Workload distribution To distribute workload across all candThe higher the candidate’s current workload is,
his/her score is
Score Candidates Continued
A candidate’s score is the sum of the individual score
Candidate total score = 40 …
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1069/1241
Candidate total score = 35 …
… so both c
qualify as e
exceeds the p
Assign Candidates
Assignment Manager:
Generates assignments using the Assignees Filter from
with the highest scoring assignee
For team-based assignment, the highest-scoring qualif
candidate from the highest-scoring rule is made primar
Rule may optionally identify the primary explicitly
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1070/1241
Will be assigned as primary (total s
Workload Distribution
Is used to distribute work among qualified candidates
Prevents individuals from being overloaded with work
Consists of:
Workload Distribution Rule
Maximum Workload
Score
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1071/1241
Service Scenario
Business Rule: Assign service requests to agents bas
product skill and current workload
Assign incoming service requests …
… to the appropriate candidate
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1072/1241
Employee: Ellen
Skill: CPU
Workload: 10 SRs
Employee: Craig
Skill: Network
Workload: 18 SRs
Employee:
Skill: Netw
Workload: 2
Workload Distribution Rules
Balance workload across candidates
Assign a computed score to candidates based on:
Maximum Workload: the maximum number of service r
that a candidate should own at any time
Score: the weight assigned to workload in comparison
criteria
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1073/1241
Calculating Scores for the Scenario
Employee: El
Skill: CPU
Workload: 10
Employee: Cr
Skill: Networ
Workload: 18
Employee: Ja
Skill: Networ
Workload: 20
Service Request
Product = Network
Assign incoming network
service request to Craig
Compute a workload score and add it to other scores
Assign a score for product skill
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1074/1241
Employee Product
Score
Employee Workload Score
Score * [1 - (Current Workload / Max LoadCraig 20 45 * [1 – (18 / 20)] = 4.5
Ellen 0 45 * [1 – (10 / 20)] = 22.5
Jack 20 45 * [1 – (20 / 20)] = 0
Craig
assign
Rule Prioritization
Multiple assignment rules may exist for the same ass
object
Can result in qualified candidates from both rules being
Business policies may require that candidates from on
rule be assigned
Assign Opportunities based onAccount State to the state sales
office
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1075/1241
Assign Opportunities based on
Account Industry to only theindustry specialistsOnly positions from this
rule should be assigned
Exclusive Rules
Rules can be marked exclusive to prioritize them
Results in only the qualified candidates from that rule b
assigned
All rules are first evaluated and scored as before
Exclusive rule must first pass and have qualifying cand
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1076/1241
Set flag to make
rule exclusive
Multiple Exclusive Rules
When several exclusive rules have qualifying candida
rule with the highest scoring candidate prevails
Keep qualifying assignees from only that rule
When two or more exclusive rules tie for highest scor
the rules prevail
Only the default candidate is assigned
Design exclusive rules carefully to avoid such behavior
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1077/1241
Sequencing Rules
Rules within a rule group can be sequenced to prioriti
A rule group is a named collection (or subset) of assign
A rule can appear in one and only one group
Rules not explicitly assigned to a group belong automatic
Default Rule Group
Defines ru
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1078/1241
Rule Sequence
Specifies the order in which Assignment Manager eva
rules in a group
Rules with the same sequence number are evaluated i
unspecified order
Rules with no sequence number are considered to hav
sequence number of 0
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1079/1241
Rule Sequence Continued
Assignment Manager pauses after evaluating rules w
sequence number
Stops if an assignment can be made
Otherwise, continues to rules with next higher sequenc
Permit hierarchical assignment strategies
For example:
Assign opportunity first to a qualifying local office
If not, then to a district office
If not, then to a regional office
If not, then to headquarters
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1080/1241
Run-Time Behavior of Assignment Manager
Is determined by the Assignment object definition
Is located in the repository
Is configured individually for each assignment object
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1081/1241
70 plus properties
Assignment Mode
Specifies how candidates are assigned when a rule a
both positions and organizations
Assign positions and
organizations independently
Assign only positions/opairs that both q
Assign organizatio
consider only correspo
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1082/1241
Assign positions first and consideronly corresponding organizations
Default Candidate
Is a predefined position/employee who is assigned in
following situations:
Conflict between two rules with same score
Assigns candidates for both rules and assigns the default
the team
Makes default candidate the primary for team-based assi
Conflict between two exclusive rules with the same sco
Assigns default candidate to the team as primary Rules do not identify any candidates to assign
Assigns default candidate to the team as primary
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1083/1241
Default Candidate Continued
Is specified as properties of the Assignment Object de
Default Employee
Default Group
Default Org
Default Position
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1084/1241
Keep Creator
If this property is set to TRUE, Assignment Manager k
creator of the record on the team regardless of which
Assign
positions/employees
to dataAssign
positions/employees
to data
Keep creator
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1085/1241
Keep creator
on team
Configuring Assignment Manager Objects
Use Siebel Tools to edit object definitions to modify th
of Assignment Manager
Same as editing other object definitions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1086/1241
Assignment Manager
Reads Assignment object from repository tables (not
repository file) at run time
No need to compile the Assignment object itself
Can deploy a modified Assignment object at run time
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1087/1241
Module Highlights
Assignment methodology refers to the steps followed
Assignment Manager to assign candidates to objects
Identify rules that apply
Identify a list of qualified candidates for the applicable r
Scoring candidates
Determine primary assignee and assign candidates
Workload rules can be used to distribute work among
candidates
Multiple assignment rules may exist for the same ass
object
Rules can be prioritized by
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1088/1241
Marking a rule as exclusive
Sequencing rules
Run-time behavior of Assignment Manager is specifie
configuration of the assignment object
Lab
In the lab you will:
Create prioritized rules
Modify the run-time behavior of Assignment Manager
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1089/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1090/1241
4
Module 47: Invoking Siebel
Assignment Manager
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1091/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
List the modes in which Assignment Manager can be in
Invoke Assignment Manager in dynamic mode
Why you need to know:
You need to enable your Siebel environment to suppor
assignment management
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1092/1241
Running Assignment Manager
Assignment Manager is invoked in three modes:
Batch Assignment
Dynamic Assignment
Interactive Assignment
All modes require that the Assignment Manager comp
group be enabled
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1093/1241
Batch Assignment
Is used to submit batches of data for one-time assign
reassignment
Is implemented via a server task
Business scenarios:
Change assignment rules and reassign existing objects
already assigned
Sales region or territory realignment
Existing assignments are inaccurate
After a batch data load
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1094/1241
Dynamic Assignment
Automatically invokes Assignment Manager to assign
near real time as records are created or modified
Business scenarios:
Whenever a service request is created, assign it to a se
with the appropriate product skill
Whenever an opportunity is created, assign it to the sa
representative who handles that territory
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1095/1241
Dynamic Assignment Continued
Is implemented using:
Assignment policies
Generate Triggers
Workflow Monitor Agent
Assignment Manager
Is similar to workflow policies
Both execute asynchronously on the server
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1096/1241
Assignment Policies
Specify which objects are to be assigned
Are expired by default
Navigate to Site Map > Administration – Assignment >
Policies
Remove the expiration date to activate policies
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1097/1241
Generate Triggers
Is a server task that creates database triggers
Builds triggers for all active assignment policies
Must be run after policies are activated
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1098/1241
Requires a user with privileges
to add triggers to the database
Workflow Monitor Agent
Start Workflow Monitor Agent and specify:
Group Name (the group of assignment policies you act
Sleep Time (interval in seconds between iterations)
Follow steps used in enabling workflow policies
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1099/1241
Assignment Manager
Is invoked by Workflow Monitor Agent
Assignment Manager server component must be online
Performs the assignment of data to candidates
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1100/1241
Dynamic Assignment Process Flow
Is similar to the flow for workflow policies
Wor
Monito
Server
Request Broker
Assignment
Manager
Siebel
Database
Generate triggers
Create triggers corresponding
to assignment policies Triggers fire when
conditions satisfied
and write record
Account created
S_
Makes
assignments
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1101/1241
Monitors S_ESC
for changes an Assignment
Evaluate the
assignment rules
Interactive Assignment
Is used to assign candidates in real time
Enabled for Service Request and Activity assignment o
Business scenarios:
A customer service representative receives a call and c
new service request, then clicks Assign to find the right
work on that service request
A field service supervisor wants to find the right person
a repair activity, and uses Interactive Assignment to obpeople with the right skills to perform the repair
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1102/1241
Using Interactive Assignment
Implemented via user interaction and tasks on server
User makes assignment from a generated list of candid
1. Select the work
to be assigned
2. Click Menu and
select Assign
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1103/1241
3. Select employee and click Assign
Requirements for Interactive Assignment
Verify that Assignment Manager is online and Server
Broker is running
Performs Assignment
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1104/1241
Brokers client requests
Module Highlights
Assignment Manager is invoked in three modes
Batch Assignment: Is used to submit batches of data fo
assignment or reassignment Is implemented by submitting a job request
Dynamic Assignment: Is used to assign data in near re
records are created or modified
Is implemented using:
Assignment policies
Generate Triggers
Workflow Monitor Agent
Assignment Manager
Interactive Assignment: Is used to assign candidates in
Is implemented via user interaction and tasks on server
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1105/1241
Lab
In the lab you will:
Create new service records and verify that they are dyn
assigned to the desired employee
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1106/1241
4
Module 48: State Models
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1107/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe how state models can enforce business logic
Create a new state model
Why you need to know:
A state model is a simple declarative way to enforce bu
that involves changes to values of certain fields in a bu
component
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1108/1241
Business Entities and Life Cycles
Many business entities have a defined life cycle desc
A set of states named by the values of one of the entity
A set of allowed transitions between the states
For example: A service request could have a life cycle
terms of these values of the status field:
Open, Pending, Closed, Cancelled
ClosedPendingOpen
Arrow indicates a permitted transition
State
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1109/1241
Cancelled
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1110/1241
Business Solution
A state model captures and enforces such restrictions
transitions
Uses a set of rules and conditions that specify allowed Uses declarative configuration as opposed to script
Is implemented in the Siebel client and not Siebel Tools
Does not involve compiling and deploying a new SRF file
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1111/1241
State Model
A state model consists of:
A set of states corresponding to the values of a single-
Must have a bounded picklist declared in the List Of Valu
State field
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1112/1241
States for this state model
State Model Continued
A state model also consists of:
A set of allowed transitions that can be restricted
Only can be executed by authorized positions Only can be executed when a condition is satisfied
Unr
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1113/1241
Condit
Only selected positions
allowed to make transition
Enabling Siebel State Model
Only a small number of business components are ena
state model in the as-delivered application
Indicated by a business component user property (Stat Other business components can be enabled for state
Business component class is restricted to CSSBCBase
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1114/1241
Creating a State Model
1. Define the Desired Life Cycle
2. Create a New State Model
3. Specify the Allowed States
4. Specify the Allowed Transitions and Restrictions
5. Specify Authorized Positions
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1115/1241
6. Test the State Model
1. Define the Desired Life Cycle
Review relevant business policies to identify restricted
transitions
Document the allowed transitions and corresponding
Closed
Cancelled
PendingOpen
Permitted only if
severity <> critical
Permitted only by
call center manager Owner must
be assigned
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1116/1241
2. Create a New State Model
Navigate to Administration - Application > State Mode
Create a new state model record
Specify the business component and “state” field
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1117/1241
3. Specify the Allowed States
Navigate to the States view
Create a record for each allowable value of the “state
Specify one state as the default initial state in which neare created
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1118/1241
Set by default
4. Specify the Allowed Transitions and Condition
Navigate to the Transitions view
Create a record for each allowable transition
Select the from and to states using the drop-down list Indicate if there are restrictions on who can execute the
Specify any conditions to be satisfied before transition
3. Deselect
Public if
4
additio
on
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1119/1241
1. Select the
from state
2. Select
the to state
Public if
transitionrestricted
5. Specify Authorized Positions
For any transitions not marked Public, specify the pos
are permitted to execute the transition in the Authorize
Positions applet
Transition
restricted
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1120/1241
Specify po
to make th
6. Test the State Model
Make sure the state model activation and expiration d
valid
Only one state model based on a given field can be actgiven time
Create one or more test records and verify that the bu
policy is correctly implemented
New state model is effective when a new application ob
manager process starts
New process reads the updated state model cache
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1121/1241
Module Highlights
A state model restricts the life cycle of a business com
Defines a set of states and allowed transitions between
State models: Are built in the Siebel client using declarative configura
Do not require recompiling the .srf file
Transitions between states can be restricted as follow
Not allowed at all
Allowed under only certain conditions Allowed by only certain positions
A few as-delivered business components are enabled
model
Customers can enable others for state model if the bus
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1122/1241
component class is CSSBCBase
Lab
In the lab you will:
Create and test a state model
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1123/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1124/1241
4
Module 49: Introducing Enterprise
Integration Manager
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1125/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you will be able to:
Describe the features of Enterprise Integration Manage
Describe how EIM supports referential integrity Describe why direct SQL statements must not be used
user data
Why you need to know:
EIM enables you to properly import external data into thdatabase
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1126/1241
Enterprise Integration Manager (EIM)
Business Challenge: To exchange large volumes of d
between an external application and the Siebel datab
Implementation project challenge: To perform an initial for a Siebel application
Business Solution: Enterprise Integration Manager (E
Is a server component that moves large volumes of da
mode between Siebel interface tables and Siebel base
Interface tables act as a staging area for external data
External
Database
Siebel Database
SiebelInterface Tables
EIM
SQL Utility
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1127/1241
SiebelBase Tables
User Data
The Siebel database contains several types of data:
Seed data: application data populated during product in
Repository data: metadata initialized at installation andduring application configuration
User data: user-supplied data, such as account records
price lists, or assignment rules
EIM is only used to move user data
Siebel Database
Seed
data
Repository
data
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1128/1241
User-supplied data such asaccount information,
contacts, or price listsUser data
Populating and Managing User Data
Use the client application to enter, update, or delete s
amounts of user data directly in the base tables
Use EIM to: Import large amounts of data from external source
through interface tables
Delete large amounts of data
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1129/1241
Siebel Database
Components of EIM
Important components of EIM are:
Non-Siebel
loading tool
Base Tables
Interface Tables
EIM Server Component
EIM Configuration File
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1130/1241
Basetable
Interfacetable
Prepared andcleansed
external data
ServercomponentSi
c
Base Tables
User data is stored in one or more base tables in the
database
Relationships between base tables (referential integrityprimary keys (PKs) and foreign keys (FKs) based on R
ROW_ID is the system primary key for every base table
ROW_ID is a system-generated value
PK FKPK
FK
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1131/1241
S_ORG_EXT S_ADDR_ORS_BU
Interface Tables
Interface tables store external data inside the Siebel d
Staging area for data to be imported, updated, or merg
base tables by EIM
Staging area for data exported by EIM
Staging area for data to be deleted in the base table by
EIM_ACCOUNT
S
Interface Tables
External
database
EIM Server
Component
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1132/1241
External data
Base Tables
Interface Tables Continued
Are meant to represent typical business “entities”
Typically map to multiple Siebel base tables
Are denormalized Example: EIM_ACCOUNT interface table maps to eigh
tables
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1133/1241
EIM Server Component
Manages the exchange of data between interface tab
user data in base tables
Belongs to Enterprise Application Integration (EAI) cogroupS_O
S_ADD
EIM_ACCOUNT
EIM Server
Component
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1134/1241
External data
EIM Configuration File
EIM server component reads a configuration file (.ifb)
determine:
Whether data should be imported, merged, deleted, or
Which interface table(s) and base table(s) are used and
Import, merge,
delete, or export
EIM Server
Component
Configu
file (
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1135/1241
User Keys
Based on multiple columns, user keys are used to un
identify a row for EIM
Primary and foreign keys based on ROW_ID are usedsystem-wide referential integrity
ROW_ID NAME LOC BU_ID
User KeyPK FK
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1136/1241
S_ORG_EXT S_BU
Referential Integrity
User key column mappings in interface tables are use
resolve ROW_IDs for base tables, maintaining referen
integrity
PK (ROW_ID)
Acme
1-8D
User key
1-8DInterface Table
FK (ROW_ID)
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1137/1241
Base Tables
SQL
You must not use SQL to populate user data in base
Relationships between tables are complex
Referential integrity is maintained programmatically thrROW_IDs, not using constraints on the database
SQL statements cannot generate Siebel ROW_IDs
FKPK
S ORG EXT S ADDR ORG
SQL
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1138/1241
S_ORG_EXT S_ADDR_ORG
Module Highlights
Enterprise Integration Manager (EIM) is a server com
that supports bulk imports and exports to and from a S
database
Useful for initial data loads
The main components of EIM are:
Base tables
Interface tables
EIM server component
EIM configuration files (.ifb)
You must not insert user data into Siebel base tables
SQL!
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1139/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1140/1241
5
Module 50: Creating Data Maps
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1141/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Determine correct interface (EIM) tables and columns to
import data into and delete data from Siebel base tables
columns
Document data mappings between EIM tables and Siebe
tables
Why you need to know:
Enables you to construct a strategy for successfully impointo and deleting data from the Siebel database
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1142/1241
Data Mapping
The first step in using EIM to import external data is d
mapping
Data mapping determines:1. Which Siebel base table columns will store external so
2. Which interface (EIM) table columns will be used to im
source to destination
Source
(external)
1. Decide
where data
ends up
2. Determine
how to geth
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1143/1241
Interface
(EIM) table
how to getthere
Source Data
Analyze external source data
Decide which attributes to store
Determine which entity the collection of attributes repre
Analyze relationships between entities
Customer
Decision
Maker
Sales
Person
Name...
Name
Name...
Entity
Attribute
M:M
M:M
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1144/1241
Name...
Siebel Destination
Analyze Siebel destination tables and columns
Start with applets and fields used, and work down to bu
layer
Use Siebel Tools to view tables and columns, business
components (BCs), and relationships
Contact
Position Account
Table
BC
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1145/1241
Identify and Verify Destination Tables and Colum
1. Determine Destination Applet
2. Identify BC Fields
3. Map BC Field to Database Column
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1146/1241
1. Determine Destination Applet
Use the Siebel client to identify applets and controls w
external data is to be displayed
Determine applet and business component names
Example: Verify mapping for Main Phone # field of an
Data to appear in Account Entry Applet
Desired
destinationapplet
BC Name
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1147/1241
Control to map
2. Identify BC Fields
Use Siebel Tools to map the applet control to the BC
Locate controlin Web Layout
view
Propertieswindow displays
field name
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1148/1241
3. Map BC Field to Database Column
Examine BC field properties in Siebel Tools to determ
Siebel base table and column it maps to
Table and
column
BC fieldbeing
mapped
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1149/1241
Map Source to Siebel Destination
Specify the source mapping to the Siebel destination
Identify business component mapped to external entity
Determine Siebel base tables and columns that will sto
attributes
Account
Contact
Positio
Customer SalesPerson
Name... Name...
Decision
Maker
External
entity
BC Table
Attribute
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1150/1241
Name...
Document Mappings
Document mappings between source and base so tha
everyone has a common understanding
EIM and configuration tasks are often performed by diff
people
Can reduce need to re-do tasks if team members leave
Address
Phone
Name
Source
AttributeEIM Table
Customer
Customer
Source
Entity
ZIPS_ADDR_ORG
CITS_ADDR_ORG
ADS_ADDR_ORG
MAS_ORG_EXT
NAS_ORG_EXT
BBase TableEIM Column
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1151/1241
How to Get There: Determine Interface Tables
After verifying and documenting the source-to-base m
determine and document EIM-to-base mappings
?
Address
Phone
Name
SourceAttribute
EIM Table
Customer
Customer
SourceEntity
ZIPS_ADDR_ORG
CITS_ADDR_ORG
ADDS_ADDR_ORG
MAS_ORG_EXT
NAMS_ORG_EXT
BBase TableEIM Column
How to
get there?SourceDe
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1152/1241
Interface (EIM) ?
Table Relationships
An interface table may populate more than one base
A base table may be populated by more than one inte
EIM_ADDR_ORG
S_ORG_EXT
S_ADDR_ORG
EIM_ACCOUNT
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1153/1241
Locate EIM Tables
Locate candidate EIM tables using Siebel Tools
Example: Locate EIM tables that populate S_ORG_EX
Query
Result
Flat tab
EIM tables that
populate S_ORG_EXT
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1154/1241
Note: Use EIM_ tables, not _IF tables
Interface Table Documentation
Mappings from interface tables to base tables are doc
by:
EIM Interface Table report available in Siebel Tools
EIM Table Mapping objects
Less convenient than using report
Query for interface
table and…
…select Reports > EIM I
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1155/1241
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1156/1241
Interface Table Documentation Continued
The EIM Interface Table report shows mapping from a
EIM table to one or more Siebel base tables
EIM column (source) to base table column (destination
Column attributes (user keys, foreign key tables, requir
Base column
Base table
EIM column
EIM table
name
Base table
D i
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1157/1241
Destina
column at
Select EIM Table
Select the EIM table that best maps to the target base
and columns
Pick the EIM table that maps the most columns that yo
migrate
Example:
EIM_ACCOUNT can be used to map Account-related P
data because it maps to the intersection table S_ACCN
S_ACCNT_POSTN
columns mapped by
EIM_ACCOUNT
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1158/1241
EIM to Base Mappings
Determine EIM columns that populate target base col
Determine other EIM required columns to populate th
base table
Other columns may be required based on required field
base table
EIMtable
Batab
EIM
columnBase
column
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1159/1241
Determine EIM Columns
Determine which EIM column populates the target ba
in Siebel Tools
Example: MAIN_PH_NUM on EIM_ACCOUNT populat
MAIN_PH_NUM on S_ORG_EXT
co
Base
column
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1160/1241
Determine EIM Columns Continued
Alternate method is to query Attribute Mappings in Sie
to determine which EIM column populates the base co
Example: MAIN_PH_NUM on EIM_ACCOUNT populat
MAIN_PH_NUM on S_ORG_EXT
Base table
and column
EIM table and column
Result
Q
Use Flat tab
to query
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1161/1241
Determine Base Required Columns
Determine required base table columns that do not ha
defaults (EIM does not recognize non-system default
Defau
recognize
Query Column
Result = required
base columns
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1162/1241
Mapping Considerations
Understand how to enter organization data
Fill in _BU column with name of the organization
Leave _BI column blank
Populated with foreign key during import processing
Understand additional columns that must be populated for
business components
Use EIM Interface Table report to identify these
Examples:
PARTY_UID PARTY_TYPE_CD
ROOT_PARTY_FLG
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1163/1241
Mapping Considerations Continued
Be aware of access control and data visibility issues
Set access control by:
Importing ownership information, or
Using assignment manager
If ownership is not set or is set incorrectly, data visibility
incorrect
Example:
Import product information to Siebel database
Product visibility is determined by organization
Map product and ownership information to EIM_PROD_IN
interface table)
Be sure to map from EIM_PROD_INT to both S_PROD_I
product base table) and S_PROD_INT_BU (Product/BU i
table)
Mapping documented in EIM Interface Table report
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1164/1241
Module Highlights
Data mapping specifies:
Which base tables and columns will hold external data
Which interface tables and columns will be used by EIM
movement
Steps to create data mappings for EIM:
Map external entities to Siebel business-layer objects
Use the Siebel Web Client to identify and verify mapping
attributes to BC fields
Select the interface table used by the mapping Use Siebel Tools’ EIM Interface Table report to perform c
column mappings between interface tables and base tab
Map all external attributes of interest plus required non-s
columns
Data mappings should be clearly documented
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1165/1241
Lab
In the lab you will:
Map external solutions data to EIM tables and base tab
Map external product data to EIM tables and base table
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1166/1241
5
Module 51: Running Enterprise
Integration Manager
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1167/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Populate interface (EIM) tables for imports
Modify configuration (.ifb) files for imports
Invoke an Enterprise Integration Manager (EIM) server ta
Modify configuration (.ifb) files to optimize imports
Why you need to know:
To successfully import external data into the Siebel datab
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1168/1241
All interface tables have three required columns:
IF_ROW_BATCH_NUM and ROW_ID are set by the u
uniquely designate a record
IF_ROW_STAT is used by EIM to return status after an
Interface Table Structure
2
1
2
1
Row_ID
IMPORTED
IMPORTED
IMPORTED
IMPORTED
IF_ROW_STAT
200
200
100
100
IF_ROW_BATCH_NUM
Toner Ca
Shredder
Fax Mach
Photocop
NA
If import job is successful, system sets
value to IMPORTED
Number to identify all
records that should be
processed in the batch
Unique number to
identify the record
in the batch
Non-null ch
value that i
during th
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1169/1241
value to IMPORTED
Running an EIM Task for Data Imports
2. Determine Processing Order
3. Run an EIM Task
4. Verify EIM Task Results
1. Populate EIM Tables
5. Remove Data from EIM Tables
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1170/1241
1. Populate EIM Tables
Populate source data into EIM tables using a non-Sie
process
Use database vendor utilities to load data from flat files
Use SELECT INTO to pull data from other SQL databa
Use direct SQL insert, update, or delete statements to
columns in EIM tables
Use SQL queries to verify that EIM tables populated co
EIM_PR
External
data
Non-Siebel
process
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1171/1241
2. Determine Processing Order
Determine the correct processing order for EIM tables
When importing, tables referenced via foreign key mus
loaded first
Refer to the default.ifb for recommended processing or
Order of imports
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1172/1241
3. Run an EIM Task
Creates an operating system (OS) process that reads
file, loads the dictionary, executes EIM steps, and wri
entries
.ifb
Log
EIM Server
Component
Dictionary
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1173/1241
Direct the execution of an EIM task using a configurat
file
Specifies the batch, order, and type of processing
Use default.ifb as a template
3. Run an EIM Task Continued
Section
IF_ROW_BATCH_NUM
value (rows to process)
EIM table
Default column
values
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1174/1241
3. Turn Off Transaction Logging
Siebel Remote logs transactions to allow synchroniza
mobile clients
Transaction logging reduces EIM performance
Before initial loads, turn off logging
Navigate to Administration – Siebel Remote > Remote Sy
Preferences
After initial loads, turn on logging to support mobile clie
Turning off transaction logging in a running production sy
require subsequent re-extraction of all mobile user databa
L
du
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1175/1241
3. Create and Run an EIM Job
Navigate to Administration - Server Management > Jo
1. Create a new job and
select EnterpriseIntegration Manager
2. Specify job
parameters, including
EIM configuration file
3. Click Submit Job
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1176/1241
3. Monitor the EIM Task
Navigate to Administration - Server Management > Ta
Query to view progress
Review Task Information Log Log d
diaginformatio
task pa
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1177/1241
4. Verify EIM Results
Run SQL SELECT statements to verify the table data
Select from EIM table
Select from ba
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1178/1241
4. Verify EIM Results Continued
After import, IF_ROW_STAT will contain a value that
the status of each imported row
IF_ROW_STAT Value
IMPORTED
PARTIALLY_IMPORTED
REQUIRED_COLS
DUP_RECORD_EXISTS
FOREIGN_KEY
PICKLIST_VALUES
Description
Success for all destination tables
Success for target base table; failur
secondary table
Failed because required column haNULL value
Failed because target table has row
with same values
Failed because a required foreign k
could not be resolved
Failed because required picklist val
found in S_LST_OF_VAL
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1179/1241
4. Verify EIM Results Continued
Verify imported data in the application using appropria
Example: Products > Internal Product List
Verify that products were
imported successfully
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1180/1241
4. Verify EIM Results Continued
Find EIM task number
Examine task log file
For troubleshooting:
Navigate to Administration – Server Management > Tas
Find task number for EIM task
Examine log file in Siebel server log directory
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1181/1241
4. Verify EIM Results Continued
Job parameters can override component-level event l
create additional information in the log
Trace Flags = 1
Records processing steps SQL Trace Flags = 8
Records summary SQL
Should only be done in test
environment
Dramatically impedes EIM
performance and generateslarge log file
Error Flags = 1
Records details regarding
failed rows
EIM logging
flags used for
troubleshooting
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1182/1241
Remove Data from EIM Tables
You are responsible for removing records from the EI
Use SQL to delete EIM table records once they have b
successfully processed
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1183/1241
Additional Configuration (.ifb) Parameters
Use enhanced configuration parameters to speed EIM
processing and reduce elapsed time:
Process Options
Import Options
Primaries
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1184/1241
Process Options
Explicitly include or exclude tables and columns to av
unnecessary processing
Use ONLY BASE TABLES, ONLY BASE COLUMNS
or Use IGNORE BASE TABLES, IGNORE BASE COLUM
Example:
Directs task to process o
these target tables
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1185/1241
Process Options Continued
Set options to control processing and enhance perfor
Set USING SYNONYMS to FALSE to avoid unnecessa
processing
USING SYNONYMS applies to accounts only Use SHELL to process multiple EIM tables/sections in
run
Example:
Directs task to
ignore account
synonyms
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1186/1241
Import Options
Set options to preprocess EIM rows and columns
Use FILTER QUERY to select a subset of EIM rows fo
processing
Use DEFAULT COLUMN or FIXED COLUMN to set vaEIM columns
Example:
EIM column,
operator, and value
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1187/1241
Primaries
Improve performance by eliminating sub-queries whe
displaying data from parent and child tables
If primaries are not used, a new query needs to be ex
identify any child records each time a parent record is Two types of Primary settings:
Explicit Primary
Implicit Primary
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1188/1241
S_ORG_EXT
ROW_ID NAME PR_ADDR_ID
1-WEZ Acme 2-AB4
S_ADDR_ORG
OU_ID ROW_ID ADDR
1-WEZ 2-AB8 Elm Street
1-WEZ 2-AB4 Main Street
EIM_ACCOUNT
NAME ADDR_ADDR ADDR_CITY ACC_PR_ADD
Acme Elm Street Boston
Acme Main Street Fremont YSet t
to
EIM table
Base tables
Set Primaries: Explicit Primaries
Use the Primary flag to set explicit primaries through
Use when the external system knows which child shou
primaryEIM t
Columns
S t P i i I li it P i i
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1189/1241
Set Primaries: Implicit Primaries
Allow EIM to implicitly set primaries
Use when the external system does not know the prima
Sets the primary to be the child with the lowest ROW_I
Mimics auto primary in the application
S_ORG_EXT
ROW_ID NAME PR_ADDR_ID
1-WEZ Acme 2-AB8
S_ADDR_ORG
OU_ID ROW_ID ADDR
1-WEZ 2-AB8 Elm Street
1-WEZ 2-AB4 Main Street
EIM_ACCOUNT
NAME ADDR_ADDR ADDR_CITY
Acme Elm Street Boston
Acme Main Street Fremont
EIM table
Base table
Columns
U i EIM ith D t b M difi ti
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1190/1241
Using EIM with Database Modifications
To populate base table extension columns through EI
Add an extension column to the EIM table
Map the EIM column to the base column
Test the mapping by running EIM on the server Use the Interface Table Mapping Wizard
EIMtable
Batab
EIM
Extension
Column
Base
Extension
Column
U i EIM ith D t b M difi ti
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1191/1241
Using EIM with Database Modifications Continued
Update EIM table mappings to include columns or tab
have added using the Interface Table Mapping Wizar
Select the table in Tools, right-click, select EIM Table
Mapping… and complete the wizard
M d l Hi hli ht
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1192/1241
Module Highlights
All EIM tables have three special columns:
IF_ROW_BATCH_NUM
ROW_ID
IF_ROW_STAT EIM import steps are:
Populate EIM tables
Create an EIM configuration file (.ifb)
Run an EIM job
Verify job results Remove EIM table records
Parameters that can speed EIM processing:
No transaction logging
Process and import options in .ifb file
Can set primaries during EIM import
Lab
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1193/1241
Lab
In the lab you will:
Load solutions data into the interface table
Import solutions data from the interface table to base ta
Load company data into the interface table and import base table
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1194/1241
5
Module 52: Introducing Application
Deployment Manager
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
Module Objectives
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1195/1241
Module Objectives
After completing this module you should be able to:
Describe the Application Deployment Manager (ADM)
Describe how deployment options are configured
Why you need to know:
ADM provides a framework to deploy application custo
efficiently and predictably
Business Challenge: Application Migration
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1196/1241
Business Challenge: Application Migration
Deploying a customized Siebel application typically in
A development enterprise (a collection of Siebel server
customizations are created
A QA/test enterprise used to test application functional One or more production enterprises that require tested
software
May involve many production Siebel enterprises
The migration of customizations may be very complex
May involve hundreds of customizations
Source and target enterprises may have different config
Development enterprise may be simpler than test enterpr
Customizations may have dependencies on each other
Example: A new state model needs to be deployed after t
business component object definition the model uses
Development and testing often occur concurrently
Business Solution: Application Deployment Man
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1197/1241
Business Solution: Application Deployment Man
Is a framework for deploying application customizatio
target Siebel enterprise
Is designed to provide an extensible facility for quick,
reproducible deployment of a wide range of customiza Includes support for many data types
Supports deployments ranging from a small patch with
handful of application modifications to a major release
SRF file
Allows creation of reusable deployment packages that
applied to multiple target enterprises
Types of Customization
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1198/1241
Types of Customization
ADM recognizes three types of application customiza
Database customizations
Repository customizations
File customizations The steps to export and deploy each type differ
Database Customizations
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1199/1241
Database Customizations
Are changes to administrative and master data record
Siebel database
Does not include repository table changes
Use EIM to migrate application records, such as AccouContacts, Opportunities
ADM supports deployment of many data types, includ
Lists of Values (LOVs)
User Lists
Assignment Rules
Access Groups
Repository Customizations
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1200/1241
Repository Customizations
Are changes to object definitions made in Siebel Tool
New or modified
repository objects
File Customizations
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1201/1241
File Customizations
Are files modified as part of application configuration
Examples:
Web Template files (.swt)
Image and Cascading Style Sheet (CSS) files Siebel Repository file (.srf)
Reports files
Example: image
files
ADM Architecture
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1202/1241
ADM Architecture
The three major parts of the ADM architecture are the
Source enterprise
Orchestration environment
Destination enterprise(s) (can be multiple targets)
Orch
Env
DestinationEnterprise
Source
Enterprise
Deployment
Package
Deployment
package
Source Enterprise
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1203/1241
Source Enterprise
Is the Siebel enterprise containing modifications to be
Example: a development enterprise
Source enterprise components related to ADM includ
Siebel client and Siebel Tools functions to export custo A packager utility to bundle application customizations
Orc
Env
Destination
Enterprise
Source
Enterprise
Orchestration Environment
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1204/1241
Orchestration Environment
Is a system used to execute ADM deployment
Orchestration environment components include:
The Siebel Management Server
A database containing records on all deployments andcontained in ADM packages
An ADM command line interface (CLI)
An ADM registry file
A target enterprise profile file, which describes the targ
environment and deployment steps
Deployment
package
Com
i
Orchestration
Environment
Orchestration Environment Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1205/1241
Orchestration Environment
Siebel Management Server is a service that supports
The ADM orchestration environment
The Diagnostic Tool, which allows performance measu
Siebel servers
Siebel Management Server
is the primary component of
ADM orchestration
environment
Orchestration Environment Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1206/1241
Orchestration Environment
The enterprise profile file:
Specifies target enterprise parameters
Is used to configure deployment options
Is discussed later in this module The ADM registry file:
Lists data types supported by ADM
Defines ADM operations for each data type
Defines deployment validation rules
Is usually not modified
ADM reg
file
Destination Enterprise
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1207/1241
Destination Enterprise
Is the target for deployment using ADM
Example: a QA/test Siebel enterprise
Can be multiple destination enterprises
Orch
Env
Destination
Enterprise
Source
Enterprise
Destination Enterprise Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1208/1241
p
Destination enterprise components for ADM include:
A Siebel Management Agent for each Siebel Server in
enterprise
ADM server components on each Siebel Server
Siebel Management Agent is a service that runs in co
with a Siebel Server and provides support for Manage
Server requests
Siebel
ManagementServer
Siebel Mgmt
Agent
Siebel Server
Siebel Mgmt
Agent
Siebel Server
Siebel Mgmt
Agent
Siebel Server
Orchestration
Environment
ADM Enterprise Profile File
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1209/1241
p
The enterprise profile file contains:
Parameters that specify target enterprise configuration
Parameters that control deployment orchestration
Parameters that describe target enterprise configurati Siebel Server connect string(s)
Siebel Management Agent name(s) and port number(s
Enterprisfile ope
Microsoft
ADM Enterprise Profile File Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1210/1241
p
Complex deployments can be customized by setting p
to control:
Deployment sequence (some deployment units have
dependencies)
Example: A modified assignment object may need to be d
before a new assignment rule
Serial versus parallel deployment
ADM supports parallel deployment of file and database ty
customizations
Staging Specifies deployment groupings by deployment unit or gr
Siebel server, or a collection of servers
Stop on error
Sets behavior of deployment on error
Module Highlights
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1211/1241
g g
ADM may be used to move Siebel application modific
from a development environment to a test environmen
Database changes (LOVs, assignment rules, and so on
Repository changes (objects definitions, workflows, and
Files changes (Web templates, CSS files, .srf files, and
The ADM architecture includes components on:
Source environment
Orchestration environment
Target environment
Advanced deployment options are set by modifying th
enterprise profile file EntProfile_<EnterpriseName>.xm
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1212/1241
5
Module 53: Deploying Application
Customizations
Siebel 8.0 Essentials
Module Objectives
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1213/1241
j
After completing this module you should be able to:
Use the packager utility to bundle application customiz
Deploy a package using the ADM command-line interfa
Why you need to know:
ADM provides a framework to deploy application custo
efficiently and predictably
Steps in Using ADM
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1214/1241
Identify All Customizations to Deploy
Export Database Customizations
Export Repository Customizations
Move File Customizations
Create an ADM Package
Deploy the Package
Identify All Customizations to Deploy
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1215/1241
The first step in planning the deployment of applicatio
customizations is to identify changes
Examination of software configuration management or
development logs may suffice
Identify repository customizations within Siebel Tools
Use Tools > Compare Objects to compare objects and
Generate a mid-level release (covered later in this mod
Identify database changes using the Siebel client or
development logs
Determine file changes using operating system (OS)
timestamps or third-party tools like diff
Identify All Customizations to Deploy Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1216/1241
Analyze data dependencies to ensure successful dep
Some ADM supported data types (parent types) are de
other data (child types)
Deploy parent types after child types
Examples:
User List depends on Users
Access Group depends on User Lists
State Model depends on List of Values
Specify the order of deployment before exporting data
changes using the Siebel client (covered later in this m
Export Database Customizations
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1217/1241
Use the Siebel Web Client to export database modific
files suitable for ADM packaging
Example: Export a collection of new User Lists
Exported files include: A file containing the exported data (XML)
A descriptor file (XML)
A log file giving export details and status
To export database changes:
Create and enable a deployment project
Specify data dependencies
Create and deploy a deployment session
Export Database Customizations Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1218/1241
Navigate to Application Deployment Manager > Deplo
Projects
Create, specify, and enable a deployment project
A deployment project is a specification of data to deplo
1. Specify Name
and Export to File
2. Specify Data
Type Name
4.Enable
3. Speci
filter to
e
Export Database Customizations Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1219/1241
Use a deployment filter to limit the records to be expo
Save a query that selects the records to be exported
Example: Save a query that selects User Lists with Name
In the ADM Deployment Projects view, enter saved que
the Deployment Filter field
Select saved
query
Export Database Customizations Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1220/1241
Determine order of data type deployment in the Applic
Deployment Manager > Data Type Explorer view
Select parent data type in the Data Types applet, then
type in child applet
State Model
(parent) type…
…depends on
LOV (child) type
Export Database Customizations Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1221/1241
Navigate to Application Deployment Manager > Deplo
Sessions
Create a new session and specify project name
Deploy the session Select Export to File, then specify export destination
1. Select Project
Name
4. File prefix isSession Id
2. Click Deploy
3. Specify
export path
Export Repository Customizations
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1222/1241
Use Siebel Tools to export repository customizations
Files created during export include:
A .sif file containing the changes
A deployment descriptor file (XML)
A log file of export steps and status
Tools offers two methods for exporting customizations
Hot fix: typically a small set of hand-selected modificati
Mid-level release: repository changes after a specified
List of objects may be edited after it is generated
Export Repository Customizations Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1223/1241
To create a hot fix in Siebel Tools:
1. Select the object definition to add to the hot fix
2. Right-click and select Add to Hot-Fix
3. Specify a name for the hot fix
4. Return to Tools’ Object Explorer and List Editor to add
object definitions
5. When done, click Export
Hot fix output is saved in …\Tools\ADM\<HF Name>
Export Repository Customizations Continued
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1224/1241
To create a mid-level release in Siebel Tools:
1. Navigate to View > Options > General and set Change
specify the cutoff date for the release
2. Select Tools > Generate Mid-Level Release
3. Provide a name for the release and click Generate List
4. Verify list contents and delete entries if necessary
5. Click Export
Package is created in …\Tools\ADM\<MLR name>
Objects modifiedsince Start Date
Move File Customizations
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1225/1241
File type customizations do not need to be exported u
Siebel client or Siebel Tools
Move files to the correct directory in the package tree (
later)
The type for a custom Siebel Repository File (.srf) is F
Repository
Create an ADM Package
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1226/1241
An ADM package is a collection of application custom
and includes:
A directory structure that organizes different types of
customization (database, repository, and file )
An ADM package descriptor file describing its contents
ADM includes a utility, admpkgr, which can create an
ADM package
Runs from command line
ADM packager syntax:
% admpkgr <init | generate | validate> <
Steps to create a package:
A. Create an empty package structure
B. Populate the package directory structure
C. Generate the package descriptor file
D. Validate the package
A. Create an Empty Package
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1227/1241
Invoke admpkgr with the init command to create an e
package directory structure
Command syntax:
% admpkgr init < package name with path >
Example:
Package
location
Empty package
directory
structure
B. Populate the Package Directory Structure
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1228/1241
Database and repository exports and file modification
be moved to the new package directory tree
For database type, move the .xml file containing data +
file
For repository type, move the .sif file + the descriptor fi
For file type modifications, the package sub-directory d
the file category:
Repository file (.SRF): < pkgdir >\file\AppServer\objects\<la
Web templates: < pkgdir >\file\AppServer\webtempl\<lang>
Images, CSS files, browser script files:< pkgdir >\file\AppServer\webmaster\<lang>
Report files: < pkgdir >\file\ReportServer\<lang >
Unused package sub-directories should be deleted
C. Generate the Package Descriptor File
I ki d k ith th t d
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1229/1241
Invoking admpkgr with the generate command:
Validates package directory contents
Calculates a checksum to ensure future integrity of the
Creates a package descriptor file for the package
Command syntax:
% admpkgr generate < package name with path >
Example:
Package
descriptor file
D. Validate the Package
I ki d k ith th lid t d
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1230/1241
Invoking admpkgr with the validate command:
Verifies the existence and format of package descripto
Checks for empty folders and redundant units
Performs consistency checks for units
Checks for the existence of valid unit files and descript
database and repository types
Using validate is optional
Command syntax:
% admpkgr validate < package name with path >
Example:
Deploy the Package
Th ADM d li i t f (CLI) d t
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1231/1241
The ADM command-line interface (CLI) command set
executed on the Management Server host
Commands contained in a batch file created by a Perl s
bundled with the Management Server
Batch file is named deploy_<enterprise name>.bat
Example: if enterprise name = Siebel, then ADM CLI batc
named deploy_Siebel.bat
Typically created in …\<mgmt server install dir >\bin
ADM commands take command-line arguments:
Command name User name
Password
Package name
Optional switches
Deploy the Package: Commands Overview
The ADM CLI s pports both req ired and optional com
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1232/1241
The ADM CLI supports both required and optional com
Commands execute in a specific order
delete
acknowledge
status
restore_activate
restore_copy
restore_session
activate
optional
required
Management
Server
valent
load
create
validate
backup
copy
Target
Enterprise
covered in thi
Deploy the Package: Load
Call load command to put references to package cont
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1233/1241
Source
Enterprise
Call load command to put references to package cont
the orchestration environment’s database
Validates package structure and checksum
Uses package descriptor file to map package contents
Management Server database
Command syntax:deploy_<enterprise > load <user > < passwor
< package name >
Example:User/password Pack
Orchestration
Environment
Deploy the Package: Create
Call create to initiate a deployment session
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1234/1241
Call create to initiate a deployment session
Command syntax:deploy_<enterprise > create <user > < passw
< package name >
Example:
Orchestration
Environment
New
Session
Deploy the Package: Copy
Call copy to move package contents to destination en
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1235/1241
Call copy to move package contents to destination en
Uses the appropriate copy method for each type of cus
Repository changes are copied to target repository
Database changes are loaded into target database
File changes are moved to correct location in target file sy
Command syntax:deploy_<enterprise > copy <user > < passwor< package >
Example:
Orchestration
Environment
Deploy the Package: Activate
Call activate to perform any steps required to make
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1236/1241
Call activate to perform any steps required to make
customizations available to users
Most data types do not require activation
Example: Proposal Template
Activation examples:
LOV activation clears the LOV cache
Workflow process activation sets the process to Active
Image, CSS file, or Web template file activation propagate
server
Command syntax:deploy_<enterprise > activate <user > < pas
< package name >
Example:
Deploy the Package: Status and Acknowledge
Call status to get information about the deployment st
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1237/1241
Call status to get information about the deployment st
package
Gives a summary of deployment status of units in the p
Use status_detail to see status information for each un
To complete a command-line deployment, call acknow
Ends deployment session
Sets session status to complete in Management Serve
Removes backup package data from Management Ser
Status example:
Deploy the Package: Other Commands
Other optional ADM CLI functions include:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1238/1241
Other optional ADM CLI functions include:
Deletes package references and sessio
Siebel Management Serverdelete
Lists packages deployed by Siebel Man
Serverlist
Sequence of commands that allows roldeployment
restore_session,
restore_copy,
restore_activate
Creates backup copy of target enterpris
will be affected by deploymentbackup
Performs checks on target enterprise b
deploymentvalidate
Validates enterprise profile filevalent
DescriptionCommand
Module Highlights
Export application customizations using:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1239/1241
Export application customizations using:
Siebel Tools for repository modifications
The ADM screen in the Siebel client for database modi
File copy into package for file modifications
Use the ADM packager utility to bundle modifications
deployment to the target enterprise
Execute commands from the ADM CLI to deploy an A
package:
Load the package
Create a deployment session
Copy the package to the target environment
Activate the customizations (optional)
Status to verify correct deployment
Acknowledge to end the deployment session
Lab
In the lab you will:
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1240/1241
In the lab you will:
Export repository and database customizations
Create an ADM package
Use the ADM CLI to deploy this package
8/18/2019 Siebels Sppt
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/siebels-sppt 1241/1241